Home

Type MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Data Link

1. G 7 Optical Fiber Cable Coaxial Cable Wiring Q 8 Precautions for wiring 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000006 8 Optical fiber cables connections 8 10 Coaxial cable connections 8 12 Shielded Twisted Pair Cable Wiring 8 14 Precautions for wiring 8 14 9 8 5 2 8 6 8 7 8 7 1 8 7 2 8 7 3 9 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 9 3 1 9 3 2 Connecting shielded twisted pair
2. opecial Link Registers 0 12 Special link registers enabled only for the master station 12 Special link registers effective only for local 1 9 24 9 4 9 9 9 6 9 7 9 8 Data Link Program Using Link Inputs X and Link Outputs Y 26 Data Link Program Using Link Relays e eee esee eee ee Data Link Program Using Link Registers W e eeeeeeee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee esos esee sessssseseese 33 Read Write Program for a Word Device from the Master Station to a Local Station 99999999 9 36 Read Write Program from a Remote Station to a Special Function 9 40 9 8 1 9 8 2 Fault Detection Program eeeeeeee ee eee ee eee ee ee esesssececcccccessececccsecccesececee 50 Read program RFRP instructi
3. b Communication between the master station and a local station 1 Communicates data between the master station and a local station using some of I O points the master station and local stations for the data link Communication between local stations or communication between a local station and a remote station is not possible 2 As for communication between the master station and a local station the sender uses outputs Y and receiver uses inputs X Transmits data from master station M to local station L1 Transmits data from local station L1 to master station 3 When communicating between the master station and a local station assign the inputs and outputs used for the data link by a link parameter The link parameter defines the correspondence between the master station inputs X and the local station outputs Y and between the master station outputs Y and the local station inputs X The following will result if you assign gt nputs X400 to X47F in master station to outputs 100 to in local station and Outputs Y480 to YAFF in master station to inputs X180 to X1FF in local station Master station Local station When Y100 to Y17F in the local sta tion are turned ON OFF inputs X400 to X47F in the master station are turned ON OFF accordingly When Y480 to Y4FF in the master station are turned ON OFF outputs X180 to X1FF are turned ON
4. 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Kbyte Total link points MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATASENDIRECEIVE PROCESSING 7 sm e AND PROCESSING TIME Applicability Oo o O 9 MELSEC A 6 3 Transmission Delay Time in Three Tier System Calculate the transmission delay time for a three tier system by adding the following delay factors to the transmission delay time 1 The transmission delay time from the master station local station for the second tier to the master station for the third tier Use the formulas in Section 6 2 3 to obtain this delay time The transmission delay time from the master station for the third tier to the local station for the third tier Use the formulas in Section 6 2 3 to obtain this delay time The time required for sending the data received from the second tier to the third tier Add either the scan time for the master station for the third tier or the link scan time for the third tier whichever is longer However if the master station for the third tier has selected the mode in which the link refresh is executed only after the execution of an END instruction of a sequence program and the link scan time for the third tier is longer add the following factor Three tier link scan time Scan time for the master station for the third tier Fig 6 2 Three tier system 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME es
5. Us 3 Displaying loop line status of the host station a Displays the forward loop line F loop and reverse loop line R loop status of the host station 1 OK Loop line is normal 2 NG Loop line is faulty 4 Displaying loopback execution status a Displays whether loopback has been executed by the host station or not 1 OK executed Loopback has been executed by the host station 2 NG not executed Loopback has not been executed by the host station 5 Displaying assignment status a Displays whether assignment has been performed by the master station or not 1 YES assignment has been performed by the master station 2 assignment has not been performed by the master station 6 Displaying error numbers a Displays error numbers when the following errors occur Remove the special function module any other A special function module other than 32 point than 32 point modules from the remote I O modules is loaded on a remote I O station tali station Change the link register W range set with the The number of words read by an RFRP link parameters instruction exceeds the link register W range e Change the number of words to be read by the RFRP instruction Change the link register W range set with the specified with the link parameters The number of words to be wri
6. LWJCICICICICICI Fig 10 4 Batch monitor screen 200 acaooacaaaa 201 202 205 204 205 206 207 aaacooaada 208 209 gaocadoad 20 gaaaooaacd 208 caaoondaad 20 ngaaagaggo 200 codoondaensag 20 naaocexaacua WF 10 11 S Q O Q G O O Q O O O MELSEC A Displays the link registers W for RFRP instructions Displays the link registers W for RTOP instructions 10 TROUBLESHOOTING es 1 Displaying ON OFF status of inputs X a Displays the ON OFF status of inputs X sent from a remote I O station to the master station 1 ON status OFF status b If the remote I O station is online the device numbers at the master station are used for the display If the remote station is offline the device numbers at the host station are used for the display 2 Displaying ON OFF status of outputs Y a Displays the ON OFF status of outputs Y sent from the master station to a remote I O station 1 ON status 2 OFF status b If the remote I O station is online the device numbers at the master station are used for the display If the remote station is offline the device numbers at the host station are used for the di
7. ee ep ss MELSEC A 5 3 6 Self diagnostics function The self diagnostics function is a function to check the link module hardware and detect errors like breaking of the cables for data link The self diagnostics function includes the following three tests 1 Self loopback test Checks the link module hardware independently including the send receive circuit for transmission system 2 Station to station test Checks the wiring of cable and the link module hardware for the two adjacent stations master station between local station local station between local station etc 3 Forward loop reverse loop test Applicable only when MELSECNET data link system is used Checks the data link line for the forward loop reverse loop and loopback mode when wiring of the all MELSECNET data link system has been connected REMARK 1 The cables for the data link are as follows MELSECNET data link system 2 MELSECNET B data link system Shielded twisted pair cable 2 Refer to Section 8 7 for the self diagnostics test method MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS SE ee ep ss MELSEC A 5 3 7 Extensive use of link relays B and link registers W in a three tier system Number of link relay B and link register W points that can be used
8. Link monitor when connecting GPP to the master station Refer to Section 10 1 1 b Local station link monitor Link monitor when connecting GPP to local stations Refer to Section 10 1 2 c Remote station link monitor Link monitor when connecting GPP to remote stations Refer to Section 10 1 3 10 1 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET mode mode MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode rr 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Applicability 10 1 1 Master station link monitor The following describes the link monitor when connecting GPP to the master station A6GPP Displays the operation status of all slave stations Displays the operation mode of the host station CONDITION FOR MASTER MODE ON LINE OFF LINE LOOP TEST MONITORING MASTER CONDITION OF LOCAL L REMOTE RY WOTAL 0 L S US ABCD NO LS ABCD NO LS ABCD NO LS ABCD STATUS OK D STOP P P MTR Displays the COMM loop line status of the host station Displays the link scan time Displays the data link system loop S CPU RUN S CPU STOP P MTR SCAN TIME PRESENT 30 ms 0 ms 10 ms OTHER STATION F R LOOP F LOOP R LOOP 0 OK E NG SCAN TIME 10 5 Fig 10 1 Master station link monitor screen when connecting to master stati
9. 5 2 7 19 MELSECNET data link system 1 1 1 4 2 1 MELSECNET II composite 5 34 MELSECNET II mode 5 32 MELSECNET B data link system 1 1 1 4 3 1 Monitoring time setting 7 17 N Network refresh parameters 7 4 O Operation mode 1 1 Optical fiber cable 5 36 8 10 P Performance Specifications 5 2 Precaution Data link system when the Second tier is MELSECNET and the Third tier is MELSECNET Data link system when the Second tier is MELSECNET B and the Third tier is 4 20 MELSECNET data link system 2 9 MELSECNET B data link system 3 6 Three tier System using the MELSECNET data SVS Ie Wfl uu uU sa Dota ri dust uda o ata ma 4 4 Three tier system using the MELSECNET B data link system 4 28 Preparatory steps before operation 8 1 PrOgIarmming uuu u 9 1 Index 1 mms R Remote I O station 1 3 Remote system assignment 7 50 Reverse loop 8 21 S
10. A2ASCPU S1 A2US H CPU S1 QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 and QCPU A Up to two of the following link modules one as a master station and the other as a local station can be used with a CPU module The two modules cannot be used only for master stations or local stations AJ71AP21 Local station Master or AJ 1AP21 S3 ster station Local station ATSJ71AP21 S AJ71AR21 A1SJ71AR21 When using a CPU module with link function as a master station for the third tier In a three tier system including a CPU module with link function and a data link module the CPU module can be used as a master station for the third tier and the data link module as a local station in the second tier Second tier Master station J C Z Qo gt Local station Third tier Note that the following 21 21 versions and later used as a master station for the third tier When configuring a three tier system with a version earlier than that use the AnACPUP21 R2 as a local station in the second tier and a data link module as a master station for the third tier 2 21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPUP21 S1 2 21 51 21 21 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM MELSEC A 4 1 3 System devices Table 4 1 Link modules available for the three tier system O Available Applicable system o MELSECNET datalink 00000000 data link Module Model Remarks
11. 1 1 2 5 Differences between the MELSECNET MELSECNET B data link systems 9999990 4 1 5 1 2 4 Differences among the MELSECNET mode MELSECNET mode MELSECNET Composite 0 G 1 2 5 Differences between QCPU A QnACPU local stations 1 11 1 3 Applicable Link Modules and General Names e eeeeeee eee ee eee ee eee eese sese eosececescececssccscsssss 1 13 1 3 1 Applicable link modules 1 13 132 General names of CPU 15 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM 2 1t02 13 2 1 Outline of the MELSECNET Data Link 5 2 1 2 1 1 Configuration of the data link system 0 0 7 _ 1 2 1 2 Features of the dat
12. 7 3 Network Refresh Parameters The network refresh parameters are set to transfer the link device LB LW LX LY which are stored in the data link module to the devices that can be used in a sequence program In the network refresh parameters set the head link device number of the data link module the head device number of the ANUCPU QnACPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU 51 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A and the transfer size The devices refreshed by this setting are those in the transfer size that begins with the head link device number and in the range assigned using the link parameter For example LB800 to FFF of the data link module are refreshed by B800 to FFF of the AnUCPU QnACPU A2ASCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A the following settings Network refresh parameters Head device No B800 Head link device No LB800 Transfer size 4096 points 1000H Link parameter Assignment range LBO to FFF Internal devices of CPU module Link devices BO ay Link parameter setting range NS SQ Refreshed range Transfer B1000 LB1000 psi LBO to 7FF range is not refreshed since it is not assigned with the refresh parameter LB17FF 2 The LB1000 to 1FFF range is not refreshed since It is not assigned with the link parameter LB1FFF Between data link modules do not set the parameter for transfer between data links Use the parameter for transfer between data links when
13. Correct the sequence pro Replace the link gram and reset module hardware Has the faulty station YES returned to the system Check if the F and R loops are wired properly If not correct the wiring Has the faulty station returned to the network COMPLETE 10 17 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A Is input voltage to power supply module on faulty station normal NO Correct input voltage and reset CPU module Has the faulty station returned to the system Set ONLINE 0 1 and reset CPU module Is mode select switch set to ONLINE 0 1 Has the faulty station returned to the system Set correct station number and reset CPU module Has the faulty station returned to the system Set the same communication speed as that of the master station Has the faulty station returned to the system Is station number setting switch set correctly YES NO Is the communication speed setting the same as that of the master station For the MELSECNET B data link system only Check faulty station by self loopback test Is there failure Replace link module on faulty station NO Has the faulty station returned to the system Check link cables connected to faulty station by station to station test COMPLETE Replace faulty link cable 2 10 18 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET
14. 9 25 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 9 PROGRAMMING wawa co 5 5 MELSEC A 9 4 Data Link Program Using Link Inputs X and Link Outputs Y This section explains the programming method for data link between the master station and local station and between the master station and remote station using link inputs X and link outputs Y System configuration For MELSECNET data link system Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote station 1 2 3 No 4 XO X20 230 0 Y30 XS X80 1 80 XO Y80 Y80 Pat 2 AJ72 E XF XAF P25 P24 P25 XF X1F YBF XF Y8F XIF X9F X9F Y4F v7F Y9F YBO Y 130 YAO Y 120 Y150 X110 Y13F YAF Y12F Y16F Y9F X12F Yi40 190 Y200 Y130 190 Y15F Y19F 17 Y20F 14 19 Y13F Input module O Output module S Special function module For MELSECNET B data link system Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote station XAO No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 A 70 J XO X20 vao X80 80 yso XO Y80 21 H gt B AJ72 AJ72 7258 B b T258 21 21 B B x
15. 8 15 otartup Procedure 8 16 Self diagnostics 11661 6600600000660000000000006000000000000060000006000000600000000000000000006000000600000 8 17 Self loopback test 8 17 Station to station test 8 19 Forward loop test and reverse loop test 8 21 9 1 to 9 52 Precautions for Creating Programs 1 opecial Link Relays 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000cccc 4 Special link relays enabled only for the master station opecial link relays enabled only for local stations
16. 7 7 Flags controlled by the can be executed LWTP instruction M21 M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 Turns M22 execution command Turns M21 OFF 22 Writes the current values of ee wre xs co H to C9 of the master station to CO to C9 of local station No SET M22 ON when an LWTP instruction can be executed RST 21 MS203 m22 Reset and initialize the LWTP instruction flag 5566 Resets initializes M22 M9202 RST M9202 and M9203 when an LWTP instruc COMPLETE M9203 RST Executed while the write command is ON Turns ON M10 execution command when the LRDP instruction is executable Flags controlled by the LWTP instruction trolled by the LRDP i i PROCEDURE was SJ ags contro y the instruction Determine whether M31 9200 9201 9202 M9203 M9236 Turns ON M30 execution command an LWTP instruction when an LWTP instruction is can be executed executable Writes the current values of CO Execute the LWTP to C9 of the master station to CO instruction to C9 of local station No 3 Reset and initialize Resets and initializes M30 M9202 the LWTP instruction gt and M9203 when an LWTP instruc flag tion has been executed Generates a pulse to execute the Turns the re execu LWTP instruction again tion command of the M30 is turned ON when M31 is LWTP instruction ON turned OFF COMPLETE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELS
17. Displays the ON OFF status of outputs Y BATCH MONITORING REMOTE I O Displaying station number Displays the station number of the remote I O station connected to the GPP Displaying number of slave stations Displays the total number of local and remote stations connected in the loop Batch Monitor The following describes the batch monitor when connecting GPP to a remote I O station x 000 17 61254587 3 000 cOmooooo im mi mim wimiwimi 020 030 040 poOuOaoadlourn 050 060 970 080 090 049 080 0CU 000 coOGODOUudOOG 060 09 gacdaaadaa gugcaoacdga pagauadaao pmaaoagmuamgaocdci 399750572 3999995024 umngooacouocd mE ETag T nuaacaacaaog 080 000 peg Use SWO SRV GPPA SWO IVD GPPA when connecting a peripheral device to the remote I O station GX Developer cannot be connected to the remote station 000 1FF 012 34567 55291219793 200095906 9359120221210 pdaadogmuadga nagaoaocgadad
18. Turn OFF the power supply Insert a plug fitting a projection of the jack into a ditch of the plug Plug the plug until the plug fixing hole fits the hook of jack Link module Slightly pull the plug in the arrow direction to make sure that it is installed properly 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION MELSEC A 3 Disconnecting optical fiber cables The following flowchart shows a method for disconnecting optical fiber cables Disconnection Turn OFF the power supply Plug Pull out a fixing part of a plug in the arrow direction Cover the plug and jack with covers which covered them before connection and store them Fig 8 8 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNETII MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION CHEN USE RN ee TT MELSEC A 8 4 3 Coaxial cable connections This section describes methods for connecting coaxial cables with link modules 1 Connecting link modules with coaxial cables Connect the F SD connector on a link module to the F RD connector on the next module and connect the R RD connector on a link module to the R SD connector of the next module Connect the F SD connector and R RD connector of the final station with the F RD connector and R SD connector of the master station respectively Master station No 1 LIL
19. 3 Master station assignment Assign the device range B WO to 3FF to be used by the master station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W 4 Slave station type Set the type of slave station the local station for the MELSECNET mode or the local station remote station for the MELSECNET II mode per station number 5 Local station assignment a Assign the device range B WO to 3FF to be used by a local station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W b Assign the link range using the outputs Y of a master station and inputs X of a local station and the inputs X of the master station and outputs Y of a local station 6 Remote station assignment a Assign the number of points of the module or special function module to be installed to the remote station b Assign the link registers W to be used for reading writing the special function modules installed to the remote station Second half link parameters The same data as that set for the MELSECNET II mode should be set for the second half link parameters 1 Master station assignment Assign the device range to be used by the master station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 2 Local station assignment Assign the device range to be used by the local station for writing data to the link relays B and link register
20. 5 SPECIFICATIONS rr Table 5 2 List of data link system functions Continued Description Reference section MELSECNET B data link system Section 5 3 1 Section 5 3 2 Section 5 3 3 Section 5 3 4 Section 5 3 5 1 Checks link module hardware and shielded twisted pair cables Section 5 3 6 Section 5 3 7 Section 5 3 8 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS Applicability rr 5 3 1 Cyclic transmission function The cyclic transmission function is a function to periodically communicate data between the master station and the slave stations local station or remote station The cyclic transmission function includes the following two communications One to one communication between the master station and slave stations Communication between the master station and all local stations 1 One to one communication Inputs X and outputs Y are used for communication between the master station and a remote I O station and communication between the master station and a local station a Communication between the master station and a remote station 1 A master station receives ON OFF data inputs X from an input module installed in a remote station and the master station outputs the operation results outputs Y obtained by the maste
21. 7 48 Local system 7 48 Remote I O system 7 50 Local remote I O system assignment 7 52 Link parameter setting example 7 56 7 10 Three Tier System 5 510 7 61 7 10 1 7 10 2 7 10 3 7 10 4 7 10 5 Common element 7 61 Using the MELSECNET mode in the second 7 GG Using the MELSECNET mode in the second tier
22. Examples 1 2 3 To transmit B W data from M to 21 a If L1 m scan time gt third tier 1 link scan time Transmission delay time from M to L1 m Transmission delay time from L1 m to 21 L1 m scan time b If L1 m scan time lt third tier 1 link scan time Transmission delay time from M to L1 m Transmission delay time from L1 m to 71 third tier 1 link scan time To transmit B W data from 71 to M a If L1 m scan time third tier 1 link scan time Transmission delay time from 21 to L1 m Transmission delay time from L1 m to M L1 m scan time b If L1 m scan time third tier 1 link scan time Transmission delay time from 1 to L1 m Transmission delay time from L1 m to M third tier 1 link scan time To transmit B W data from 1 to L3 a If L2 m scan time gt third tier 2 link scan time Transmission delay time from 1 to L2 m Transmission delay time from L2 m to L3 L2 m scan time b If L2 m scan time third tier 2 link scan time Transmission delay time from 1 to L2 m Transmission delay time from L2 m to L3 third tier 2 link scan time When the master station for the third tier executes link refresh after the execution of an END instruction of a sequence program add the L1 m scan time to the values obtained with calculation in 1 b or 2 b If 3 b is used for the calculation add the L2 m scan time 6 LINK DAT
23. Fig 7 29 Input X and output Y assignment example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 5 Link parameter setting When the assignment of 1 to 4 is executed set the link parameters as shown in the figure below a First half link parameters 000 37F 000 2BF 00 800 8FF 300 341 360 39F 680 77F 230 59F 600 77F 200 4BF NT CEPR INTER MITTENT 10ms n B W B DW W OW Y Y X X qr qur VDI lt lt 100 1 240 2 100 1 280 37 230 30F 680 6FF 700 77F 030 10F 200 27F 200 27F 200 28F 600 67F 700 77 000 08F 280 2FF 200 27F 480 59F 080 19F 320 341 380 39F 400 4BF 000 MASTER L LOCAL REMOTE PRESS lt SSN gt TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RANGE B W MELSECNET II LOCAL b Second half link parameters MELSECNET MULTI MODE LINK 800 AFF 800 AFF Mn W D T INTER FOR LINK MITTENT 10ms MEN m wx zzzzzzzzzz lt lt 2225 0250 mr ur 2277 lt lt 2522 25 MASTER L LOCAL R REMOTE PRESS lt SSN gt TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RANGE OF B W L LOCAL R REMOTE MELSECNET II LOCAL MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS j CL 25 m MELSEC A 7 10 Three Ti
24. MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite II composite mode mode A0J2HCPUP21 P21 d These cannot be used as a master station for the third tier A2CCPUR21 21 A1NCPUP21 S3 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPUP21 S1 CPU A2NCPUP21 S4 module AoNCPUR21 S1 with link Use the stati b 21 se the station number unction setting switch to set the A3NCPUP21 S3 selection of master ASNCPUR21 local station A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUP21 S4 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUP21 S3 A3ACPUR21 REMARK 1 The definitions of station 2 station and station Table 4 1 are as mode follows a L m station Local station in the second tier master station in the third tier b 2 station Local station in the third tier station Remote station in the third tier UM AY Ox 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 1 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued Module Model O Available Remarks MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET II composite 4 c I O U A1SHCPU A2SHCPU A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 2 A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A3NCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A3ACPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU AJ71AP21 R21
25. 7 68 Using the MELSECNET composite mode in the second tier 7 70 Link parameter setting example eeeeeeeee ee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee esses esesesesessscececsscscssso 7 72 7 11 Assignment of Inputs and Outputs to the Master Station in a Remote System 9999 7 81 7 11 1 7 11 2 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 3 8 4 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 4 3 8 5 8 5 1 assignment restrictions 7 81 assignment example 7 83 8 1 to 8 23 Preparatory Steps before Operation Q 1 oetting the Link Module Station Numbers 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000c6 0 2 Setting the link module station numbers the MELSECNET data link system 99999 2 Setting the link module station numbers in the MELSECNET B data link System 8 5 oetting Communication
26. Common Element 7 19 Maximum number of link points per station e eeeeeeeeeeee ee eee ee eee eee eee e eoe esee ec eosscesecscocse 7 19 Determining the link relay B assignment range eseeeeee eee eee eee eee e ee eee eee eeeseeseessees 7 20 Determining the link register W assignment range e eeeeeeee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeseeeeesee 7 21 Determining the input X and output Y assignment 0 000 000000 7 23 Link Parameters In the MELSECNET Mode 7 24 Local system assignment and link parameter setting example 7 24 Remote I O system assignment and link parameter setting 7 30 Local remote system assignment and link parameter setting example 7 35 Link Parameters In the MELSECNET 0 6 900660000000000000000000000000000000000000060000006000000 7 42 Link Parameters In the MELSECNET Composite Mode
27. Input Output rei Input AJ72P25 module module module module 16 points 32 points 32 points 16 points Slots marked with 1 cannot be assigned as an empty slot 51 52 S3 54 or 55 because an input or output module is loaded The slot marked with 2 can be assigned as an empty slot 3 If slot O in a remote I O station is empty at least 16 points 52 53 54 55 must be assigned to an empty slot If 51 is set for an empty slot a UNIT VERIFY ERROR will occur Input Output AJ72P25 Empty module module Input modulis module 16 points 32 points 32 points 16 points lll d The empty slot cannot be set as a 0 point empty slot 4 When assigning inputs and outputs to a special function module set the number of points of the module actually installed If the wrong number of points is set and the RFRP or RTOP instruction is executed an error will occur I O assignment cannot be used to change the number of I O points for an input output module connected to the A0J2P25 S3 R25 compact type remote station module Assign the same number of I O points that is assigned to a remote I O station configured with the A0J2P25 S3 R25 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS ee a 1 MELSEC A 7 11 2
28. LOCAL REMOTE L REMOTE Fig 9 12 Link device assignment 9 Program example PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE M9237 M9238 If slave stations No 1 to 4 local stations SCJ Po remote I O stations are normal the Check whether the sequence jumps to PO slave stations are M9036 normal If normal skip WAND H1 99228 Sets Os in 09228 except for bO No 1 the fault detection program for slave stations No 1 to No 4 WAND H1 D9224 011 Sets Os 09224 except for bO No 1 Turns M11 ON if b0 in D9224 09228 Hi pu WAND H2 09228 02 Sets Os 09228 except for b1 No 2 Determine whether No 1 i is normal or not by bit 0 values 1 0 in WAND 09224 012 Sets Os 09224 except for b1 No 2 2 Turns M12 ON if b1 09224 09228 is 1 error Determine whether No 2 is normal or not by bit 1 Sets all of the bit data D9228 to 0 WAND D values 1 0 in WAND 09228 except for b2 No 3 D9228 and D9224 Sets all of the bit data in D9224 to 0 H WAND 09224 013 except for b2 No 3 T os 3 Turns M13 ON if b2 09224 09228 is 1 error Determine whether No is normal or not by bit 2 values 1 0 in D9228 and D9224 wano ne oszze D4 Sets all of the bit data in D9228 to 0 Sets all of the bit
29. MELSECNET compatible station 0 Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 DEVICE EFE ee NUMBER bis bra be ee ps be ba or Ds202 ure t18 fre fez Jus fra is t2 fts ps20s_ o_ ts1 tso 29 tze 127 vae ves 124 422 Ler veo ere t17 Stores the status of No 17 to No 31 Stores the current path of the data link 1 Forward loop 0 Data link 5 Data link impossible Master station Station 1 e 5 is stored because the watchdog timer setting is too small data 09204 is updated each time the link status changes Link status 9 MELSEC A Table 9 6 List of MELSECNET B special link registers Continued Device Name Data Description Number D9207 Maxi iia Stores the time used for data link processing link scan time by all of the local stations and remote I O stations the loop currently being used for data link in 10ms unit Link scan time definition M Ls 4 09208 Link scan time Minimum value P us ums o Link scan time M Sequence program scan time by master station LS Link sean time data link processing D9209 Current value Stores the total number of retries conducted when a transmission error Occurs Definition of retry processing If data is lost or becomes unreliable due to the occurrence o
30. MITSUBISHI Type MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manual CL gt ANE Vll A Lll LLL NEN o um _ Mitsubishi Programmable Controller SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION NWARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury 1 Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage wm m Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions N WARNING For the operating status of each station
31. R SD RSD reverse loop TVA ING NN Cae N Send in Receive in Send in Receive in reverse loop reverse loop reverse loop reverse loop reverse loop Send in Receive in Send in Receive in Send in Receive in forward loop forward loop forward ioop forward loop forward loop forward loop Coaxial cable 2 Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Fig 8 9 Connecting link modules with coaxial cables 2 Connecting coaxial cables The following flowchart shows a method for connecting coaxial cables Connection Link module Jack Turn OFF the power supply Plug Insert a plug fitting a projection of the jack into a ditch of the plug Projection Rotate the plug in the arrow direction Ditch clockwise properly until it comes to the position shown below Fig 8 10 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION MEL SE A 3 Disconnecting coaxial cable The following flowchart shows a method for disconnecting coaxial cables Plug Link module Turn OFF the power supply Rotate a plug in the arrow direction to loosen the connection E Fig 8 11 Hold the plug and pull it out in the arrow direction shown below 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION es F 8 5 Shielded Twisted Pair Cable Wiring This section describes a connection method for shielded twisted pair cables
32. Turned ON while the host station itself is in the forward loop test mode or M9252 Loop test status reverse loop the reverse loop test mode test is being executed RUN or STEP RUN Controlled according to the operation status of the master station M9253 Master station status e Turned ON when the status of a master station is either STOP or PAUSE operating status STOP or Turned OFF when the status of the master station changes to RUN or PAUSE STEP RUN status turned OFF when bits D9248 to D9251 are all OFF Controlled by detecting an error of a local station other than the host station Turned ON if an error occurs in one local station other than the host station Error status of N Norma in the loop M9255 local stations p Error Automatically turned OFF when the faulty station returns to the normal state or the data link returns to the normal state by switching the loop line That Controlled according to the operation status of a local station other than the RUN or host station STEP RUN Turned ON when the status of a local station other than the host station in Operating status of the loop is either STOP PAUSE M9254 local stations STOP or Not turned ON when the status of the host station itself is either STOP or except host PAUSE PAUSE statis e Automatically turned OFF when the status of a local station other than the host station in the loop changes to RUN or STEP RUN
33. Turns M1 ON if the start signal is turned ON while an RFRP instruction or an RTOP instruction is not being executed Stores 10 word data in addresses 0 to 9 of the special function module loaded to X Y30 to X Y4F of the remote 1 0 station to W300 to W309 of the master station Stores the data in W300 to W309 to D200 to D209 after a read called by an RFRP instruction has been completed Generates a pulse to positively reset M1 M1 is turned ON when M2 is turned OFF Resets and initializes handshake signal Y7OE when reading called by an RFRP instruction has been completed RFRP instruction cannot be executed special function module error Resets error signal X71D of the Special function module 9 MELSEC A NOTE 1 To execute an RFRP instruction always interlock with YnE and X n 1 E n the device number of the master station that corresponds to the I O number of the slot in which a special function module is installed It is first 2 digits of the 3 digit representation for the first half link parameters 16 points of 32 occupied points and at the same time do not execute an RFRP or RTOP instruction at two or more positions within a single special function module Turn ON OFF YnE and X n 1 E as shown below RFRP execution 1 Turned OFF a sequence program 2 The RFRP execution start signal must be always turned ON by the SET instruction If an OUT or PLS
34. c o Q C2 N 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 3 2 List of link modules Continued Q Available Applicablesystem system EE GM system Description Link module CPU module MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Remarks NET I II composite mode mode mode Program capacity Number of I O points RIM LIM Module for remote I O stations which is to AJ72T25B be mounted to the following base unit me A32B S1 A35B A38B Installed in the CPU slot Module for remote I O stations which is to of a main base unit A1SJ72T25B be mounted to the following base unit 1532 1533 1535 A1S38B 1 M L and R stations in Table 3 2 indicate the following stations a M station Master station b L station Local station C R station Remote station 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM In A m SE A 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM In a three tier system a local station in the second tier is used as a master station for the third tier and connects with the slave stations MELSECNET data link system and MELSECNET B data link system can be used for the second and third tiers The combinations are shown in Fig 4 1 When both the 2nd and 3rd b When the 2nd tier is MELSECNET c When the 2nd tier is MELSECNET B d When both the 2nd and 3rd tiers are tiers are MELSECNE
35. determine an assigned range for each of master and local stations a Examine the link register W assignment range of the first and second half link parameters for each MELSECNET II mode compatible station The device range assigned with the first half link parameters can be read by the master station and all local stations However the range assigned with the second half link parameters can only be read by MELSECNET II mode compatible stations Determine the assignment range according to the station with which data communication will be executed b The device range that can be assigned with the first half link parameters is WO to 3FF ra DATA LINK SETTINGS n c The device range that can be assigned with the second half link parameters is the range assigned with the first half link parameters final device 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B100 or later can be assigned to the second half parameters If O point is assigned with the first half link parameters assignment with the second half link parameters can be started with WO Link relay link register B WO 2 be read by master station parameters and all local stations n 3FF 4 B Wn B Wn t 1 Assigned with Can be read by MELSECNET II the second half compatible station only link parameters 4 Divide the M R area
36. e Add 50ms to the maximum link scan time value read out and set it as monitoring time When using the A7YOBD J71P21 R21 or A7BD J71AP21 R21 as a master station add 250ms to the maximum link scan time value and set it as monitoring time MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS j CL 25 m MELSEC A 7 6 Common Element The following describes the common information to know before assigning link parameters 7 6 1 Maximum number of link points per station The maximum number of link points number of points assigned to a station by link parameters of B W X Y that can be used for data link of a station master local or remote station in the data link system 1 Maximum number of link points per station master station and local stations a MELSECNET mode Up to 1024 bytes of link points can be used by a station master or local station Use the following formula to calculate the maximum number of link points B points Y points gt points lt 1024 bytes 8 6 MELSECNET II mode or MELSECNET II composite mode Up to 1024 bytes of link points can be assigned to the first half link parameters and up to 1024 bytes can be assigned to the second half link parameters used by a station master or local station Use the following formula to calculate the maximum number of
37. link register W into the lt R area and the M gt area and assign them Only the WO to 3FF range can be used for the M R area a When connecting more than one remote I O station assign an M R area and M gt area to each remote I O station For example when connecting two remote stations divide the M R area and M R area into two stations as illustrated below and assign them WO 100 180 200 300 340 380 3 0 2 2 Lt L4 Empty Ra Ha Rs 1 R2 indicates the remote I O station No 2 2 indicates the remote I O station No 3 Fig 7 25 Link register W assignment example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS mm ar cr m r rr b Consider the range used by the system when assigning the M R area The system uses the M R area to execute the RFRP RTOP instructions 1 Number of points used by the system The link register W 1 point is used for one special function module installed to a remote station 2 Range used by the system The range used by the system is from the head device number of M R area assigned to each remote station to number of use points 1 For example when two special function modules are installed to remote station No 3 the range W380 to 381 in the M R area W380 to 3BF is used by the system as shown below Link register W380 For system use W381 gt area of remote W382 I O station No 3 W383
38. manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Dec 1991 IB NA 66350 A First edition Jul 1993 IB NA 66350 B Correction CONTENTS Section 1 1 1 1 2 2 to 1 2 4 1 3 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 4 4 1 1 4 1 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 5 1 5 6 6 2 6 2 1 to 6 2 3 6 3 6 4 8 8 2 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 6 8 7 2 9 3 1 10 3 1 Oct 2003 IB NA 66350 C Equivalent to Japanese version H Overall reexamination Apr 2007 IB NA 66350 D The following link modules are added A1SJ71AP23Q R23Q A1SJ71AT23BQ ABOUT MANUALS COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Section 1 2 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 Section 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 1 1 2 4 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 4 2 4 4 3 5 1 5 2 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 8 5 4 1 5 5 1 6 1 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 7 2 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 5 7 6 1 7 6 3 7 6 4 7 7 1 7 7 3 7 8 7 9 1 7 9 2 7 9 3 7 9 4 7 10 1 7 10 2 7 10 3 7 10 4 7 10 5 7 11 1 8 1 8 3 8 4 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 4 3 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 7 2 8 7 3 Chapter 9 Section 9 1 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 1 9 3 2 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 7 1 9 8 9 8 2 9 9 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 4 10 5 Oct 2007 IB NA 66350 E Correction Section 4 3 3 5 2 Sep 2010 IB NA 66350 F The following CPU modules are added 2 Q02HCPU A QO6HCPU A SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 5 1 5
39. phrases This manual is described based on the screen examples of the SWLIGP GPPA When using GX Developer or any other peripheral some of the screen displays or functions may be different from those of this manual Refer to the manual for the product in use 1 OVERVIEW MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode mode Applicabiity j o o 1 2 Basic Information about Data Link Systems This section gives the basic information for using the MELSECNET and the MELSECNET B data link systems Read this section carefully before going on to Chapter 2 1 2 1 Master local and remote stations In a data link system link modules are classified into master stations local stations and remote stations as shown below 1 2 3 Master stations Controls slave stations local stations and remote I O stations connected to data link system Sets link parameter for the MELSECNET data link system and the MELSECNET B data link system A data link system must contain one master station Local stations Controls I O and special function modules of the host station in a program of the host station Remote stations Controls the module and special function module of the host station in a program of master station v
40. 1 Read write of devices T C D and W from the master station to a local station The transient transmission function reads writes the link registers W whose range is not set by link parameters or the devices T C D where cyclic transmission is not possible An LRDP or LWTP instruction is executed in the master station sequence program to read write devices T C D and W of a local station Refer to Section 9 7 for details on the LRDP and LWTP instructions Example The following results when writing data from D20 through D29 in the master station to D200 through D209 in local station No 3 Master station Local station No 3 Execution of LWTP instruction Data number to be written Head device number of write source Head device number of write destination Indicates local station No 3 to which the data is written Pee im me FR e D Gs eee Gb UR DG UR P UR u 0 Gm gm 5 m G GB G GU UD AR GP GR XR Um c e m ds GR Ge OUR d cm Gm Ue AM o c o 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 2 Read write of buffer memory in a special function module installed to a remote I O station Use RFRP or RTOP instruction to read write buffer memory of a special function module installed to a remote I O station from the master station Data communication can be executed between the master station and a remote I O station only when RFRP or RTOP instruction is executed To use RFRP or RTOP instru
41. 1024 bytes station Setting of both first and second halves 2048 bytes station 1 OVERVIEW es F Table 1 2 MELSECNET Data Link Function Overview Continued Operation mode MELSECNET B data link system MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode AnNCPU AJ71AT21B AnACPU AJ71AT21B AnUCPU AJ71AT21B QnACPU AJ71AT21B AnSCPU A1SJ71AT21B AnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QCPU A A1SJ71AT21B A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AT21B AnNCPU AJ71AT21B AnACPU AJ71AT21B AnUCPU AJ71AT21B QnACPU AJ71AT21B AnSCPU A1SJ71AT21B AnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QCPU A A1SJ71AT21B AnACPU AJ71AT21B AnUCPU AJ71AT21B QnACPU AJ71AT21B AnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QCPU A A1SJ71AT21B A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AT21B AnACPU AJ71AT21B AnUCPU AJ71AT21B QnACPU AJ71AT21B AnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QnASCPU A1SJ71AT21B QCPU A A1SJ71AT21B QCPU A1SJ71AT23BQ QCPU A1SJ71AT23BQ A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AT21B RENE o ore errr 2 types Link parameters first A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AT21B 2 types Link parameters first and second halves and second halves Setting of first 1024 Setting of first 1024 half only bytes station half only bytes station 1024 bytes station Setting of Setting of both first 2048 both first 2048 and second bytes station and second bytes station halves halves 512 bytes station I O 512 points X YO to 1FF station The last number in firs
42. 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 UR UR UR UR UR um un 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 un uR uR LR ui jum um Jum um 63 62 61 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 If a local station goes down data before the failure will be held When contents of D9224 to D9227 and D9228 to D9231 are ORed and the relevant bit is 0 the corresponding bit in the above special registers is enabled Even If the host station master station goes down the data before the failure will be also held e Example When local station No 5 is set as a remote I O station 1 is set for bit 4 of 09220 When 09220 is monitored its value is 16 10 When the link parameter settings is corrected and the status of the master station is switched from STOP to RUN the bit is automatically reset to O 9 MELSEC A Table 9 5 List of MELSECNET special link registers Continued Name Number D9224 D9225 D9226 D9231 Initial communication between local and or remote stations Local station or remote station error Data Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to No 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of
43. 4 Displaying loopback execution status a Displays whether loopback has been executed by the host station or not 1 OK executed Loopback has been executed by the host station 2 NG not executed Loopback has not been executed by the host station b The loopback execution status is the same as content in M9243 5 Displaying B W Y receive status a Displays whether the link relays B link registers W and link outputs Y are being received from the master station 1 OK receiving B W and Y are being received from the master station by the cyclic communication 2 NG not receiving B W and Y cannot be being received from the master station due to disconnection of host station b The B W Y receive status is the same as content in M9246 10 7 10 TROUBLESHOOTING n X 6 Displaying B W receive status local station in three tier system M9247 a Displays whether a local station in the three tier system is receiving the link relays B and link registers W from the master station in the two tier system 1 OK receiving B and W are being received from the master station in the two tier system by the cyclic communication 2 NG not receiving The local station is in a status in which W are not being received from the master station in the two tier system Reception will be disabled when M9247 is turned ON 7
44. 72 can be B W to 37F L1 m for the BIW300t0 37F suom m Reading of the other stations third tier 1 i B W380 to 3FF M L2 m L3 m 21 2 2 is not possible B W200 to 27F Oo ny the stations connected to the Master station 2 0 0 E tier 2 L2 m 2 1 22 can L2 m for the read Reading of the other third tier 2 B W380 to 3FF stations M L1 m L3 m 21 22 is not possible Distinguish between the device range to communicate with the stations in the two tier link and the device range to communicate with the stations in the three tier link and write a program As for L1 m station Table 5 3 for example use the device range B W80 to FF for communication with the stations M L2 m L3 m connected to the two tier link Use device range B W200 to 2FF for communication with the stations 21 22 connected to the three tier 1 link MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode oc MELSECNET II site mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS Applioabiliy rr 5 3 8 MELSECNET mode and MELSECNET composite mode When a MELSECNET II mode compatible link module is used as the master station the operation mode for the MELSECNET data link system can be selected in the MELSECNET II mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode depending on the system configuration POINT 1 When the MELSECNET II mode is used if a MELSECNET mo
45. D9243 data of the station 0 to 64 Used by a local station to check the host station number itself D9244 Slave station Stores a slave station Used by a local station to check the total number of slave stations number data number in the loop Stores the accumulated number of times that the following errors are detected in the loop line currently being used Receive error Stores the accumulated total np A 09245 CRC OVER AB IF detection count number of receive errors 2 e Errors are counted up to and then counting is stopped Execute the reset operation to clear the data to 0 No 1 to No 16 If a local station except for the host station goes down data before the failure will be held When the corresponding bit in D9252 to D9255 is 0 the relevant bit in the above special registers is validated Even If the host station master station goes down the data Stores station numbers of the local stations excluding the host station whose status is either STOP or PAUSE NUMBER ersTera ora r2 013 pto oo ba oz be ss ba ba ba Stores the status of D9248 Local station operating status before the failure will be also held When the status of a local station is either STOP or PAUSE the corresponding bit is set to 1 When the status of the local station changes to RUN or STEP RUN the bit is automatically reset to 0 The bit status of remote I O station al
46. L ao x 2 L a gt 2 M cy Integer decimal fraction rounded up LRDP completed M x 2 a x Mx44 a x3 a3 LS Remote I O station to master station M Sequence program scan time for the master station L Sequence program scan time for a local station LS Data communication send receive time 0 1 Link refresh time for the master station 02 Link refresh time for a local station 03 I O refresh time for a remote I O station 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME mmn nn r rn M lt L lt LS L lt M lt LS 9 2 1 LS a LC Integer decimal fraction rounded up L ca LS a LRDP LRDP executed Integer decimal fraction rounded up completed ct 5 4 01 4 9 x2 Je tS executed L 42 04 Lowes k Q4 Ct4 Uy Integer decimal fraction rounded up 9 x2 M L1 a 2 01 LSet mss cq 22 aa tion rounded up kawsas LSx 24 ay M LSx5 aix6 M LSx2 a x3 aa MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING no eee Em mde arais AND PROCESSING TIME 55 MELSEC A 2 The following shows the transmission delay times when the CPU of the type that makes a link refresh after END processing is used Table 6 3 Maximum transmission delay time M a1 LS LX2 a2 MtadtLXSTa2xz Link relay B Link register W M Output
47. M9232 Local station status STOP or PAUSE operating status STOP or e Turned OFF automatically when the status of all local stations changes to PAUSE RUN or STEP RUN That is M9232 is turned OFF when bits D9212 to status D9215 are all OFF 9 MELSEC A Table 9 1 MELSECNET special link relays list Continued Device Description Number Turned ON when a local station in the executed loop detects an error in No error another station M9255 ON Local station error e M9233 Error Turned OFF automatically when the faulty station is returned to the normal detected state or the data link returns to the normal status by switching the loop line That is M9233 is turned OFF when bits D9216 to D9219 are all OFF For local station Parameter inconsistency was detected since devices other than the link relay B and link register W ranges which are Local station or dC ERO assigned to the lower link master station are assigned to link parameters M9235 remote station P for the lower link with link parameters for the upper link parameter error For remote I O station Error assignment or neither inputs X detected outputs Y are set with the link parameters Turned OFF when the error is eliminated by correcting the link parameters That is M9235 is turned OFF when bits D9220 to D9223 are all OFF e Turned ON while a local station and or
48. QnACPU A2US H CPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A is determined by the network refresh parameter and the link parameter Refer to Section 7 3 When a MELSECNET data link system is used 1 Master station Use the following formula to calculate the link refresh time o 1 required for the master station In the MELSECNET mode or MELSECNET composite mode the number of B W points is all of the points that are set with the first and second half link parameters B Xo Y at km1 km2 x 3 052 ms 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME es x N Km FK K ROEHCPUPZURZL 0 1150 BO 08 08 1 ASACPUP2URI 108 AnNCPUP21 R21 AJ71AP21 S3 R21 08 12 6 4 A2ACPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 R21 4 32 515 A2UCPU S1 71 21 53 21 4 32 A3UCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 4 16 Master WMISCPUTATSUPAPZURZI 182 188 657 staionfor AISIPUSS AISITAPZURZI 444 18 888 the second RZSCPUTAISTIAPZURZI 108 14 ier MSHOPUTATSITIAPZVRZI 08 05i 382 ATSJHCPU 2 A2SHCPU ATSJ7TAP2T RZI A2CCPUP2T R2 502 08 084 438 AHUSHCPUSTrATSITIAPZURZ 045 43 RAS CPUS ATSJTTAPZT R2 RASC UTS IY ATSJ71AP2T RZI RAPS FAITIAPRTSORAT 09 OT 486 437 o OACPUTA9TAP2IS3R2I 04
49. Self diagnostics function 5 28 8 17 Self loopback test 8 17 Setting of the Number of Modules 7 2 Setting the link module station numbers 8 2 Slave stations 2 1 3 1 Special link register 9 12 Special link relay 9 4 SS CIN 5 1 Station to station 8 19 T Three tier 4 1 Transient transmission function 3 3 5 16 Transmission delay time 6 7 6 20 Troubleshooting 10 1 Communication error occurrence in the unspecified number of slave stations 10 24 Data link disabled at a specific station 10 17 Data link disabled throughout the entire system 10 15 Error occurrence in data communication 10 19 Twisted pair cable 5 41 8 14 Two tier system 2 7 3 5 W 8 8 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failur
50. YBF Y13F YAF 12 12 Y140 Y190 HT YI5F 19 Y17F Y20F Yi4F Y19F Yt3F YIAF input module Output module S Special function module For MELSECNET B data link system Master station I O station Local station Local station Remote station 2 3 4 Y70 Xo 20 PU Y70 XO 80 Aire xar YBF Y7F XIF X9F 2 Y4F Y130 YAO Y 120 Y 150 X110 YBF II YAF Y12F Y16F X12F 140 190 200 Y130 190 15 Y19F Y17F Y20F Y14F Y19F Y13F Input module Output module Special function module 00 Fig 9 5 System configuration 9 33 9 MELSEC A Link device assignment LINK 000 15F 000 186 200 294 300 3C1 260 47F 580 7FF 1A0 3BF 500 76F SLAVE M ALLL MASTER PC B gt W DW W e Y Y X X lt lt 50 060 18 15F 700 7FF 390 47F 260 36F OAO OFF 100 186 250 294 340 3 1 030 12 250 33 1 0 2 6D0 76F 1A0 25F 2 0 500 5 000 09 210 2 300 41 000 580 6AF 080 1AF 1 L LOCAL REMOTE Fig 9 6 Link device assignment 9 es F Program example Master station program A program to store 0 to 10 to
51. connected to the bypass switch e If a master or local station has the communication error link data just before the communication error will be held in the station e f the communication error occurs on a remote I O station all of the output modules mounted on the station turns OFF Normally operating station will hold link data received before occurrence of the communication error The following describes how the link data of normally operating station and abnormally operating station is handled dividing into the master station local station and remote station 1 When a communication error occurs at a master station a Communications with all slave stations are stopped b The master station either turns ON M9210 or stores 5 in D9204 The data received from a slave station is maintained in a state just before the occurrence of the communication error The link special relays M9224 to M9239 and link special registers D9202 to D9242 of the master station the data is maintained in a state just before the occurrence of the communication error c The local stations turn ON M9250 and M9251 At devices in the range of the data link data is maintained in a state just before the occurrence of the communication error d At remote stations all of the points of the output modules and special function modules installed to the host station are turned OFF 2 When a communication error occurs at a local station a The
52. set to RUN Until then the master station treats the QCPU local station as a faulty station relevant bit in D9228 to D9231 is turned ON Starts data communications with other stations 1 11 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC A Table 1 3 Differences between QCPU and A QnACPU local stations Continued QCPU local station A QnACPU local station Item LRDP LWTP instruction receive processing Access from peripheral to host station Access from peripheral to other stations 1 Network diagnostics of GX Developer Forward loop test Reverse loop test Replacement for special relay for link Handles the received instruction with the sequence program If the LRDP LWTP instruction is received when the CPU module is in STOP status sends an error response to the master station 4 LRDP LWTP inexecutable on the station The following are not available Buffer memory batch monitor test Network diagnostics of GX Developer Unable to access other stations Master station QCPU local station e QCPU local station Master station Unable to use the network diagnostics of GX Developer The data link status or fault location can be checked by refreshing the special relay for link and special register for link of the local module into CPU module devices Place the QCPU local station into RUN status Y10 ON to conduct the test If the test is conducted in STOP status Y10 OFF the master station treat
53. 04 Station No 03 Station No 03 Fig 8 4 When setting the same station number 4 When the number of slave stations set with link parameter differs from the actual number of slave stations a When the set number of slave stations is greater than the actual number of slave stations the slave stations do not exist in the system are treated as communication faulty stations b If the set number of slave stations is less than the actual number of slave stations the data link is only performed to the slave stations set with the link parameters All other slave stations are processed as off line mode stations MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET I MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION TT ESS Ee ee MELSEC A 8 2 2 Setting the link module station numbers in the MELSECNET B data link system Assign station number from the master station set 00 to the master station in ascending order to the forward loop direction The settable maximum station number is 31 Master station 00 Station No Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 Slave station No 3 Slave station No 31 Station No 01 Station No 02 Station No 03 Station No 31 Fig 8 5 Setting link module station numbers REMARK For station number setting of the link modules refer to the manual for each link module In the MELSECNET B data link system the
54. 3 1 5 4 1 5 5 2 10 3 3 10 4 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Feb 2012 IB NA 66350 G Correction mE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Section 5 1 10 3 3 Japanese Manual Version IB 68277 N This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1991 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the A series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 16 11 Contents of This Manual 0000000000000 00000000000000 000000000006 000000000 _ 2 1 2 Basic Information about Data Link 5 516015 00000000 0000 0000 0000000000 600000000000000000000 1 3 1 2 1 Master local and remote I O stations e seeseesseeseessecceeccoccoecooccoocooccoecocccoesooccoesoosoee 3 1 2 2 Outline of the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link systems 9 9 9990 00000
55. 37F zzzzzzzzz2z gt gt gt SECOND M L lt 1 MASTER L LOCAL REMOTE L LOCAL PRESS SSN TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RENGE OF B W R REMOTE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS Applicability MELSEC A 7 4 3 Link parameters to be set for the MELSECNET II composite mode When the MELSECNET II composite mode is used two types of link parameters first half and second half are provided The system can be operated in the MELSECNET II composite mode with only the first half link parameters set In this case however the device range used for data link is B WO to 3FF and the system will operate on the same level as the MELSECNET mode system Assign the range of B W400 to FFF of the link relays B and link registers W to the second half link parameters First half link parameters The same data as that set for the MELSECNET mode is set for the first half link parameters 1 Link total slave stations The number of slave stations local stations remote stations to be connected 2 Monitoring time Refer to Section 7 5 The time used by the system to determine whether communication between the master station and all slave station local stations and remote stations is being executed normally
56. 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies IB NA 66350 G Type MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manual MELSECNET B R E 13JF70 IB NA 66350 G 1202 MEE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDI MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 831 GOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI K
57. 6 15 12 ur Do213 1 2 131 130 129 128 127 526 s taa tes Lzz ies L20 119 8117 09214 Las 547 546 545 t44 La Laz La1 t40 Lao 138 137 Lae Las 134 133 109215 tes Lea Le2 te1 tse Lse Lo 156 655 1541 53 5 Leo 49 If a local station goes down data before the failure will be held When contents of D9224 to D9227 and D9228 to D9231 are ORed and the relevant bit is 0 the corresponding bit in the above special registers is enabled Even If the host station master station goes down the data before the failure will be also held When the status of a local station changes to STOP or PAUSE the corresponding bit is 1 The bit status of remote I O station always remains 0 indicating RUN Example When the operation status of No 7 changes to the STOP 1 is set to bit 6 of D9212 When D9212 is monitored its value is 64 404 Stores the numbers of the station that detect the occurrence of an error at another station DEVICE i MEMBER b15 b14 13 b12 b11 p10 bo es bs bs ba es vo ezie Lte uts cro craicr erofte Tur ts cs 1 t2 os pez 9 Lea Les Lea Les Lse Ls7 556 55 Loa 152 151 1 50 149 If a local station goes down data before the failure will be held When contents of D9224 to D9227 and D9228 to D9231 are ORed and the relevant bit is 0 the corresponding bit in the above speci
58. 8 5 1 Precautions for wiring The following shows the precautions when wiring shielded twisted pair cables in MELSECNET B data link system 1 Laying shielded twisted pair cables When laying shielded twisted pair cables follow the precautions below to prevent extraneous noise and surge induction a Do not install shielded twisted pair cables together with the main circuit high voltage cable or load carrying wire or bring them close to each other Keep a distance of 100 mm 3 94inch or more between them b Connect remote module terminal block so that enough distance can be secured between shielded twisted pair cables and the module power or I O signal cables c Do not use any part of shielded twisted pair cables e g One pair of the cables from three pairs of them to supply power d When connecting disconnecting a shielded twisted pair cable be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system 2 Connecting a terminal resistor Connecting a terminal resistor came with the data link module 110 1 2 W between SDA RDA and SDB RDB at both end stations of a MELSECNET B data link system is required P an twisted pair cable D L sese CL Terminal resister 110 Q 1 2 W 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION MELSEC A 8 5 2 Connecting shielded twisted pair cables Wire shielded twisted pair cables to link modules as shown in Fig 8 12 Connect terminal resistors to both
59. 800 8FF MELSECNET MODE LINK NA A fO 280 37 200 37F xxX lt lt SSS0S0 lt lt 5050 t L WW PRESS lt SSN gt SELECT 1ST 2ND RANGE OF B W MASTER L LOCAL R REMOTE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 7 DATA LINK S ETTIN GS Applicability MELSEC A 7 9 Link Parameters the MELSECNET II Composite Mode The following describes the link parameter setting when the MELSECNET II composite mode is used The system configuration in the MELSECNET II composite mode includes the following three types e System consisting of a master station and local stations Local system e System consisting of a master station and remote 1 0 stations Remote I O system e System consisting of a master station local stations and remote stations Local remote system 7 9 1 Local system assignment When setting link parameters of a local system consider the following points for assignment 1 Examine the link relay B and link register W range to be assigned with the first and second half link parameters for each MELSECNET II mode compatible station As for MELSECNET mode compatible stations only first half link parameters is set a The device
60. BO to 3FF range and the WO to 3FF range If the 400 to FFF range or W400 to FFF range is assigned to the master station for the third tier the area cannot be used for the first half link parameters including the MELSECNET mode link parameter for the third tier 2 When the M R area is required for the third tier either provide an empty area in the WO to 3FF range with the link parameter for the second tier or use the M R area for the second tier MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS Applicability rr 7 10 5 Link parameter setting example The following describes the link parameters for the third tier exemplifying the system configuration shown in Fig 7 44 The link parameter setting for the second tier is the same as explained in Section 7 7 to 7 9 The number of assignment points for each station is the number of points shown in Table 7 6 station wien Remote I O station Local station ee 2 bd 2 station No 1 R1 No 2 L1 ower link master 4 R4 station L3 m xo Y7O P21 m AJ72 SIC CPU PU 25 f P21 P21 X4F XSF YSF YBO Y 130 YAO Y 120 Y13F Y12F Y140 Y190 III 19F Y Y20r Yi4F Yi9F Lower link Lower link Lower link local statio
61. D209 when reading called by an RFRP instruction is completed Resets and initializes handshake signal Y70E when reading called by instruction has been completed or RFRP instruction cannot be executed special function module error Resets error signal 710 of the special function module 9 2 Executed always while the start signal is PROGRAMMING Check whether communication with re 60 remote I O station No 1 is normal Error processing Reset the handshake signal for the RFRP and RTOP instructions we no ioe NO M100 Start signal M2 Y7OE Y7OF X71E X71F an F sagra 71 Read with an RFRP instruction X71E X71D X710 Reset the error signal of the special function module COMPLETE M3 X71D Sequence program for 2 78 MCR remote station No 1 MELSEC A Detects an error in remote I O station No 1 when of 09228 is 1 Detects parameter transfer of remote I O station No 1 Parameters are being sent when bO of D9224 is 1 Turns M10 ON when an error is found in remote I O station No 1 or during parameter transfer Resets handshake signals Y70E YnE and Y70F YnF if a communication error occurs during the execution of an RFRP instruction or an RTOP instruction by remote station No 1
62. Displaying local station operation status D9248 to 9251 D9252 to D9255 a Displays the operation status of the local station 1 RUN Station in RUN status 2 STOP Station in STOP status 3 DOWN Station is disconnected from the link due to power supply OFF b The operation status of the station number part of remote I O stations will always be RUN regardless of normal status or power supply OFF etc 10 8 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING IR TNT MELSEC A 10 1 3 Remote station link monitor This section describes the following link monitor when connecting GPP to a remote station Loop monitor Displays the data link status of the host station b Batch monitor Can batch monitor the devices that communicate data by host station Loop Monitor The following describes the loop monitor when connecting GPP to a remote station LINK MONITORING REMOTE I O Displays the STATUS STATION NO R3 loopback execu i i tion status Displays the operation mode of the host LINE LOOP BACK OFF LINE Displays the LOOP TEST assignment status Displays the COMM STATUS LOCATION communication status of the host remote P MTR WAITING station Displays the loop F L
63. Example The following flowchart shows how loopback switching occurs when power of No 4 is turned off in the system shown in Fig 8 2 Power OFF at No 4 Loopback processing should be executed at No 3 An error occurs because No 3 does not exist The processing time was doubled because loopback switching oc Loopback processing is twice executed at No 2 The data link restarts in the loopback mode COMPLETE qum w w w dm oue de G dm de UM TA oU ee dm wn do dm Ge 4m Ke Ue dee ee G mo um 00 G w n Q F mm nn sz m Q m m m m m 4 2 Station numbers have to be set in ascending order Station numbers cannot be set in descending order as Fig 8 3 Fig 8 3 When setting station numbers in descending order 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION es 3 station numbers in the same loop to be all different If the same station number is assigned to another station in the same loop the link module closer to the receiving port of the master station is applied and the link data in the other station is ignored Therefore the setting as Fig 8 4 cannot be made In the configuration shown left Forward loop link data of No 3A are effective on the forward loop and link data of No 3B are effective on the reverse loop Station No 06 Station No 01 Station f No 05 Station No 02 Station No
64. M9250 Checks if the host station can communicate data M9251 b Data communication status with other stations Check a faulty local station other than the host station D9252 to D9255 he operation status of local stations other than the host station RUN STEP RUN or STOP PAUSE c Number of receive errors e The accumulated number of receive error occurrences 09245 d Link card hardware error M9211 e Mode setting switch setting status in the link card M9240 f Data link status Forward loop error M9241 Reverse loop error M9242 Loopback in the host station M9243 5 SPECIFICATIONS es When MELSECNET B data link system is used 1 Events checked by the master station a Data communication status with a slave station local station and remote I O station e Stores stations in which a communication error occurs 09228 09229 Stores stations at which initial communication necessary for starting communication has not been completed 09224 and 09225 Stores the operating state RUN STEP RUN or STOP PAUSE of a local station D9212 D9213 Link parameter error Checks if the link parameters for the host station is not set or the data has an error M9206 Checks consistency whether the B W assignment range overlaps between link parameters set for a slave station master station for the third tier and those set for the host station M9207 Number of communic
65. MELSECNET mode LS K Kn x Total number of remote I O stations KL x Total number of local stations ms 2 Inthe MELSECNET II mode LS K KL x Total number of local stations Number of local stations allocated to second half link parameters Ka ms 3 ln the MELSECNET II composite mode LS K Krx Total number of remote I O stations Kt x Total number of local stations Number of local stations allocated to second half link parameters Ks ms 4 K KL and KR values in the calculation expression vary depending on the communication speed of MELSECNET B data link system Find them from the following speed setting Constant SOOK 5 By calculating the total number of link points bytes and from one of the graphs 1 to 4 on the next page obtain a KB value used for the calculation expression Yor 16 8192 Total number of link points 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME MELSEC A 1 Ka in the case of 125kbps 2 Ka in the case of 250kbps a When the first and latter halves of link parameters are set b When only the first half of link parameters is set 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Kbyte 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Kbyte Total link points Total link points 3 Ka in the case of 500kbps
66. No 5 Station No 4 Disconnected station Loopback Fig 5 7 Local station or remote I O station power failure data link When one master station and eight slave stations are used 5 23 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS SE ee ep ss MELSEC A 5 3 5 Fault detection function In the data link system the data link operation status is stored in the special relays M and special registers D so that it can be easily checked with a sequence program and peripheral device Some special relays M and special registers D can be read by the master station while some can be read by a local station For details of special relays and special registers refer to Section 9 2 The following describes the major events that are detected by the fault detection function When MELSECNET data link system is used 1 Events checked by the master station a Data communication status with a slave station local station and remote station Stores stations at which a communication error occurs 09228 to 09231 Stores stations at which initial communication necessary for starting communication has not been completed D9224 to D9227 e Stores the operation status RUN STEP RUN or STOP PAUSE of a local station D9212 to D9215 b Link parameter error Checks whether the link
67. No 3 all local stations In addition link relays B 256 points and link registers W 256 points are assigned with the second half link parameters to communicate with local station No 3 MELSECNET II compatible station b Local station No 2 is MELSECNET mode compatible station Link relays B 256 points and link registers W 256 points are assigned with the first half link parameters c Local station No 3 is MELSECNET II mode compatible station Link relays B 256 points and link registers W 128 points are assigned with the first half link parameters to communicate with master station local station No 2 master station and all local stations In addition link relays B 256 points and link registers W 256 points are assigned with the second half link parameters to communicate with the master station master MELSECNET II mode compatible station 7 56 ra M L area for the first half link parameter M L area for the second half link parameter DATA LINK SETTINGS mm nrrrmn r Uii 2 Assignment of link relays B a Assign 256 points for the master station 256 points for local station No 2 and 256 points for local station No 3 with the first half link parameters Assign 256 points for the master station and 256 points for the local station No 3 with the second half link parameters Master station M Local station No 2 L2 Local station No 3 L3 Used as Used as Used as internal internal i
68. OFF Uncompleted Used as a conditional contact to reset M9200 and M9201 after the completed ON Completed completion of word device read processing called by an LRDP instruction e Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program after it has been turned ON e Turned ON when an LWTP word device write instruction is received Used a user program as an interlock for an LWTP instruction LWTP instruction OFF Unreceived M9202 e Remains after the completion of word device write processing called by received ON Received an LWTP instruction Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program Turned ON after an LWTP word device write instruction has been executed The execution results are stored in D9201 M9203 LWTP instruction OFF Uncompleted Used as a conditional contact to reset M9202 and M9203 after the completed ON Completed completion of word device write processing called by an LWTP instruction Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program after it has been turned ON Link parameter OFF N Turned ON when no link parameter of the host station is set or any of the Norma M9206 error in the host ON E settings is incorrect Error station To turn it OFF use the RST instruction in the user program Link parameter OFF N Turned ON if a lower tier link uses device ranges B W outside the range Norma M9207 inconsistency with ON Error that is set to be us
69. OFF accordingly Master station Local station 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 2 Communication between the master station and all local stations Link relays B and link registers W are used for communication between the master station and a local station or communication between local stations Link relays B and link registers W are used by the master station and all local stations in common Link relays B and link registers W send data to other station using the range assigned to the host station with a link parameter Link relays B are internal relays for the data link and are used for sending ON OFF data Link registers W are data registers for the data link and are used for sending 16 bit data e Link relays B and link registers W handle different types of data However the range of communicating with other stations in the data link system is the same The following explains the range in which communication is possible with link relays B and link registers W when using the MELSECNET mode In the MELSECNET mode and MELSECNET II composite mode although the function is basically the same stations with which communication is possible partly differ between the range assigned to the first half of the link parameter and the range assigned to the second half of the link parameter For details refer to Section 5 3 8 a Two tier system configuration 1 The master station and loca
70. PROCESSING TIME 6 1 to 6 22 6 1 Link Data Communication 0 0 0 1 6 1 1 Communication processing outline 1 6 1 2 Link refresh execution 0 9 2 6 1 3 Link data during a communication error 6 5 62 Transmission Delay Time in Two Tier 7 6 2 1 Transmission delay time in a two tier system B 622 Link refresh 8 G 12 6 2 3 Link data communication time link scan eeeeeeece eee eee eee eee eee eee o eee ee esee eeseoseessee se 6 17 6 3 Transmission Delay Tim
71. S1 A1SJ71AP21 Q2ASHCPU S1 A1SJ71AR21 002 15 71 21 2 15 71 21 Q02HCPU A 15 71 21 Q02HCPU A A1SJ71AR21 15 71 21 15 71 21 A2UCPU AJ71AR21 A2UCPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 gt gt Ro N gt C C s 329293 c3 N I 1 2 icd 1 1 1 1 um TA 1 1 e AJ71AR21 A3UCPU AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71AP21 21 83 AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71AP21 S3 gt gt lt gt gt S gt gt lt gt gt 5 c 2 c 5 lt C 2 cc cla claclac n2 s M o DN MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite composite mode mode mode mode Use the station number setting switch to set the selection of master or local station AJ71AT21B 54 MELSECNET MELSECNET composite modes can be used for the second tier 2 MELSECNET MELSECNET and MELSECNET composite modes can be used for the second tier 3 Applicable when the A1SJ71AT21B is used 4 26 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM mms 4 4 Three Tier System using the MELSECNET B Data Link System When the second and third tiers are configured with MELSECNET B data link system connect the stations using shielded twisted pair cables a Up to 31 local and remote I O statio
72. Slave Slave Optical fiber cable Local station Coaxial cable Slave No n Local Local No 1 No n N nx 64 station station e n 64 ih Sub slave Sub slave 1 Third tier Remote Remote No 4 1 0 0 2 No 4 No 2 station No 3 station Sub siave Sub slave Sub slave Local station station Sub slave Sub slave Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Master i Master station station Non Local Local No 1 No n Local Local n lt 64 station station lt 64 station station No 1 Slave Slave n Slave Slave u Second tier u Second tier Remote Remote No 4 Remote Remote No 4 0 0 2 uo VO No 2 station station station station ARN No 3 PA lave pem d Nas Slave Coaxial cable Local station Local station ical fi y Masterstation BEN Ma maiaa Optical bel espe Slave Slave No n Local Local No 1 No n Local Local n x 64 station station lt 64 station station 0 1 Gub slave Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave f 1 Third tier t Third tier Remote Remote Remote Remote No 4 0 uo No 2 No 4 VO io No 2 station No 3 station station No 3 station usse NS LZ ub siave Sub slave Sub slave Local Local station stalion Sub siave Sub slave Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Coaxial cable Optical fiber cable 1 In MELSECNET data link system up to t
73. TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RENGE OF B W LOCAL R REMOTE LOCAL REMOTE MELSECNET II LOCAL MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS Applicability o 0 9 7 5 Monitoring Time Setting The monitoring time is the reference time used by the system to determine whether communication between the master station and all slave stations local stations and remote stations is being executed normally 1 Ifthe link scan is repeatedly executed within the monitoring time set time the local stations and remote I O stations determine that the master station is operating normal data link normal 2 Ifthe link scan is not repeated within the monitoring time the local and remote stations determine that the master station is faulty data link error and the following processing is executed a Master station 1 Communication with all slave stations stops If the automatic return function is selected communication is retried 2 Receive data is maintained in a status just before the occurrence of the communication error 3 The value 5 is stored to data link special register D9204 b Local stations 1 The ERROR LED TIME of the link module lights 2 Receive data is maintained in a status just before the occurrence of the communication error 3 Data link special relay M9251 link stop is turned ON Remote stations 1 The ERROR LED TIME of the link module lights 2 All
74. That is M9254 is is M9255 is turned OFF when bits D9252 to D9255 are all OFF 9 MELSEC A Table 9 4 MELSECNET B special link relays list Device E Name Data Description Number M9204 LRDP instruction Uncompleted Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word device read completed Completed processing called by an LRDP instruction M9205 LWTP instruction Uncompleted Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word device write completed Completed processing called by an LWTP instruction Link card error Normal M9211 Turned ON when the link card hardware is faulty local station Error Online Offfline Turned ON when the host station is in offline station to station test or self station to loopback test mode M9240 Link status P I station test Turned OFF when the host station is reset after being placed in the online or self mode loopback test Received M9246 Data unreceived Turned ON when the data from the master station has not been received Received Turned ON when a sub slave station has not received data from the master M9247 Data unreceived Unreceived station in the three tire system That is M9247 is ON while M9208 is Turned ON when the link parameters have not been received from the M9250 Parameter Received master station unreceived Unreceived Automaticall
75. Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word device read completed Completed processing called by an LRDP instruction M9205 LWTP instruction Uncompleted Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word device write completed Completed processing called by an LWTP instruction Link card error Normal 9211 Turned ON when the link card hardware is faulty local station Error Online Offfline Turned ON when the host station is in offline station to station test or self station to loopback test mode M9240 Link status os station test Turned OFF when the host station is reset after being placed in the online or self mode loopback test Turned ON when any of the following errors occurs the forward loop line between the host station and the preceding station M9241 Forward loop line Normal Cable disconnection error Error Forward loop receiver error of the host station link module Forward loop transmitter error of the link module on the preceding station Turned OFF automatically when the error state is eliminated Turned ON when any of the following occurs in the reverse loop line between the host station and the next station Cable disconnection Reverse loop line er M9242 Reverse loop receiving part error in the data link module of the station error itself Reverse loop sending part error in the data link module of the next station Turned OFF automatic
76. WO Assigned with the RE link Can be read by master station parameters and all local stations nz3FF B Wn B Wn 1 Assigned with Can be read by MELSECNET I the second half compatible station only link parameters 2 Determine the link relay and link register W assignment range for each master station and local station Refer to Section 7 6 2 and Section 7 6 3 3 If the number of link relay B points is insufficient examine to substitute inputs X and outputs Y for one to one data communicated between the master station and a local 4 Make sure that the number of link points per station is as follows Refer to Section 7 6 1 e Master station s first half link parameters 1024 bytes or less e Master station s second half link parameters 1024 bytes or less e Local station s first half link parameters 1024 bytes or less e Local station s second half link parameters 1024 bytes or less 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es Link parameter setting example The link parameter setting of the system configuration shown in Fig 7 20 is explained when the MELSECNET II mode is used Master station Local station Local station Local station No 1 2 No 3 70 Y70 X0 X70 X0 70 21 2 CPU XF XIF AP AP 21 21 XF Y7F Input module O Output module Fi
77. Y Master station to local station LRDP or LWTP instruction Local station Link relay B to master Link register W station Input Y Local station Link relay B M M I Link register W LS up s N d LS g L1 X EHD zu E 7 x L1 E l 2 hO EJ P t tp tj Iw ae B yg to local station M ca1 LS Output Y Master station to remote I O station RTOP instruction Mx44 a1 x3 a3 LS Remote station to master station M Sequence program scan time for the master station 1 Link refresh time for the master station L Sequence program scan time for a local station Q 2 Link refresh time for a local station LS Data communication send receive time Q 3 I O refresh time for a remote I O station 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME ms M lt L lt LS L lt M lt LS M lt LS lt L M a 1 LS LX3 a2X2 A penal i i R M E E i compete
78. a Up to 64 local and remote I O stations can be connected to a master station for the second tier b For the third tier up to 64 local and remote I O stations can be connected to the master station which is the local station for the second tier 4 1 1 System configuration Fig 4 2 shows the configuration of the three tier system Master station M Optical fiber cable Slave Coaxial cable Seis No 4 Remote Remote No 2 station station Slave No n Local n lt 64 station Optical fiber cable Sub slave Sub slave M Coaxial cable i Third tier No 4 Hemote Remote No 2 station O station Sub slave No 3 Sub slave 2 Local station Any local station indicated by shading can be used as the master station for a third tier Fig 4 2 Three tier system configured with MELSECNET data link system 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A In the three tier system optical fiber cables and coaxial cables can be used together for the second and third tiers Combinations of the optical fiber cables and coaxial cables for each tier are shown below Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable Master station M No n Local No 1 No n No ns64 station station n 64 station Slave Slave Second tier Second tier Remote Remote Remote No 4 yo Vo No 2 No 4 10 nee station No 3 station station Slave
79. be sent Range where L2 m can receive data Range where L2 m can send data Local station No 3 L3 1 The L3 station writes data to the devices in the range of B W300 to 37F and sends it to other stations When B300 is turned ON in the L3 station for example B300 in other stations are also turned ON Except for 7 1 22 2 1 and 7 2 stations 2 The L3 station can receive data written to the devices in the range of B WO to 2FF by other station 3 Devices in the range of B W380 to 3FF can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B W0 100 180 1 0 200 280 2 0 300 380 3FF Lim 71 22 L2 m 2141 7 L3 F Range where L3 can receive data Range where L3 can send data I 5 SPECIFICATIONS mr mmm Local station No 1 2 1 in the third tier 1 1 The 7 1 station writes data to the devices in the range of B W180 to 1BF and sends it to the other stations When 180 is turned ON in the 21 station for example 180 in other stations are also turned ON Except for 2 1 2 2 stations 2 The 21 station can receive data written to the devices in the range of B WO to 17F and B W1CO to 1FF by other stations 3 Devices in the range of B W200 to 3FF can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B WO 100 180 1 0 200 280 2CO 300 380 Lim 41 22 L2 m 21 72 R 9 Bee Range where 21
80. block data link operations can be continued even if power supply to one of the local stations is turned OFF Replace the link module of a faulty station as shown below START Turn OFF the power to the faulty station Remove the link module terminal block from the link module Remove the link module from the unit j o gesessen Refer to the User s Manual for the CPU module Install a new link module in the base unit Refer to the User s Manual for the CPU module Attach the terminal block to the link module Turn ON the power Resume data link operations COMPLETE 10 27 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A MEMO 10 28 INDEX A Assignment of link devices for a Three Tier System n 7 61 Automatic return function 5 4 5 19 C Coaxial cable 5 37 8 12 Communication speed 8 7 Comparison MELSECNET mode MELSECNET Il mode MELSECNET composite mode 1 6 Comparison MELSECNET MELSECNET B 1 5 Cyclic transmission function 3 2 5 6 D Data link modules Data link system when the Second tier is MELSECNET and the Third tier is MELSECNET Data link system when the Second tier is MELSECNET B and the Third tier is 4 22 MELSECNET data
81. can be assigned with the Range that can be assigned with first half link parameters for the third tier second half link parameters for the third tier Fig 7 33 When only first half link parameters for the second tier are assigned 7 DATALINK SETTINGS mm ar cr m r rr 5 Inthe three tier system link relays B and link registers W be assigned to the ranges explained in 1 and 4 In the MELSECNET data link system range check of link parameters for second tier and link parameters for third tier is performed This check is called the consistency check In the consistency check the link relay B and link register W range assigned with the link parameters for the third tier are checked whether or not to be within the range assigned by the host station master station for the third tier using link parameters for the second tier The check results are stored to M9235 and D9220 to 9223 in the master station for the second tier and to M9270 in the master station for the third tier a The consistency check is executed using the parameters shown in Table 7 5 according to the operation mode combinations of the second and third tiers For example if the operation mode of the second tier is the MELSECNET II composite mode and the operation mode of the third tier is the MELSECNET II mode the first half link parameters for the second tier is compared with the first half link parameters for the third tier and the secon
82. compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals User s manual for the CPU module used User s manual hardware for the CPU module or base unit used 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 1 OVERVIEW SECA 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the performance functions and programming procedure for the MELSEC A Series MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 1 Data link system MELSECNET data link system MELSECNET data link system is a system to connect link modules via optical fiber cable or coaxial cable and to control them The system can be configured in the MELSEC A series The only difference between a system using optical fiber cable and a system using coaxial cable is a distance between link modules Other functions operations are the same MELSECNET B data link system MELSECNET B data link system is a system to connect link modules via inexpensive twisted pair cable and control them The system can be configured in the MELSEC A series Oper
83. describes the link parameter setting when the MELSECNET mode is used When the MELSECNET composite mode is used the first half link parameters can be set in a similar way The system configuration in the MELSECNET mode includes the following three types System consisting of the master station and local stations hereinafter Referred to as a local system e System consisting of a master station and remote stations hereinafter referred to as a remote system e System consisting of a master station local stations and remote I O stations hereinafter referred to as a local remote system Concept and precautions at link parameter setting are described per each system configuration 7 7 1 Local system assignment and link parameter setting example The following describes the assignment of link relays link registers inputs and outputs and the link parameter setting Assignment for a local system When setting link parameters of the local system the following points must be considered 1 Determine the link relay B and link register W assignment range for each master station and local station Refer to Section 7 6 2 and Section 7 6 3 2 Ifthe number of link relay B points is insufficient examine to substitute inputs X and outputs Y for the information communicated between the master station and a local station one to one Refer to Section 7 6 4 3 Make sure that the number of li
84. end stations SDB RDB SDB RDB SDB RDB SDB RDB sot ss ips Tel FG AE Shielded twisted pair cable Fig 8 12 Connecting shielded twisted pair cables to link modules REMARK Use M4 size terminal screws for terminal blocks that connect shielded twisted pair cables Select solderless terminals suitable for the terminal screws Terminal 110 Q 1 2 W gt o a z o E o 110 Q new The tightening torque range is from 78 to 118 N cm MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION UNSERE ee ee NL MELSEC A 8 66 Startup Procedure In MELSECNET data link system the power supplies have to be turned on simultaneously or in the order of system from lowest to highest 1 Two tier system Power on the system in the following order All slave stations Master station 2 Three tier system Power on the system in the following order All sub slave stations slave stations in the third tier slave stations in the second tier Master station for the second tier REMARK 1 If the automatic return function is set for the master station and all of the slave stations other startup procedures are also applicable For example if the automatic return function is set to the master station for the second tier and the master station for the thir
85. following CPUs A1SJ71AP21 S3 AnSCPU AnUSCPU Installed in an I O QnASCPU QCPU A slot in a base unit AJ71AP21 Module for data link used with a CPU module without AJ71AP21 S3 Jo the link function ACPU A0J2P25 Compact type module for 1 A0J2P25 S3 o remote stations i module AJ72P25 el Module for remote stations which is to be Installed in the CPU mounted on the following slot of a main base AJ72P25 S3 base units unit A32B S1 A35B A38B Used only for local stations Module for data link used Installed in an I O with a QCPU module slot in an extension base unit 2 10 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A REMARK 1 The M L and R stations in Table 2 2 indicate the following stations a M station Master station b L station Local station C R station Remote station 2 1 Applicable only when used in combination with the A2US H CPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A 3 2 Applicable only when used in combination with the ANACPU AnUCPU or QnACPU 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A 2 Data link module using coaxial cable The data link modules that can be connected with coaxial cable are listed in Table 2 9 Table 2 3 Data Link Modules Connectable with Coaxial Cable O Applicable Applicable system system tier x Twotiersystem Module Mod
86. following method 1 Check the LED indications RUN LED off ERROR LED on of all data link modules for the faulty station Refer to Section 10 4 for the ERROR LED indications 2 Turn off all stations power supply and turn them on in order starting with the master station At this time check that which station stops the normal data link Replace the fault detected data link module and then make sure that a data link returns to normal Normal data link Under normal operating status the data link uses the forward loop Loop data is sent received in the following order master station station No 1 station No 2 etc O Data link station Received in forward loop S Sent in forward loop Master station Received in reverse loop s Sent in reverse loop 1 Station No Forward loop Fig 5 4 Normal data link When one master station and eight slave stations are used 5 20 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 3 Data link when the forward loop is faulty If data link using the forward loop is disabled due to a broken cable or a problem with a forward loop cable connector the loop is automatically switched from forward to reverse to maintain the data link In the reverse loop link data is sent in the following order master station station No n station No n 1 Data link operation when a forward loop cable is broken or disconnected is illustrated in Fig 5 5 The cable between stat
87. in the in the master master master master station station station station Coil Performs ON OFF control of link relays B Contact Reads ON OFF data using contacts of link relays B Local station No 2 L2 O Usable range Fig 7 45 Link relays B assignment example Continued ra DATA LINK SETTINGS 4 Assignment of link registers W Master station M Remote station No 1 R1 wooo o n 1 9 re M P ares EE Mo 2 2 area M L area al wosr LvVaeantarea 11 first half link W160 L lO parameters aem fof Wi F waso was LA ee ee wseo FIM Pere L it M R area W3A4 R4 M Rarea waca eee en ee O j W3E4 area 1 o W400 penne foo fof Weoo Empty area with NENNEN located with weoo errr O Eo o Au parameters W780 Empty area WFFF Fig 7 46 Link registers W assignment example a An empty area in the WO to 5F range is used to assign an M R area for the third tier with the link parameters for the second tier The assignment can also be made by using the M R area for the second tier W360 to 3E3 MELSEC A 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A Link using local station No 3 L3 m as the master
88. instruction is executed 2 The number of link points can be reduced by mounting modules to a remote I O station in groups of input modules special function modules and output modules as shown below If the installation of I O modules is changed from a to b a reduction of 16 input assignment points and 32 output assignment points can be achieved Output module 16 points Output Output module module 64 16 points points Special function modute AJ72 module module module points points points X2F X4F Xer X7F YBF Assigned input points Assigned output points REMARK The same concept is used to set the link parameters of a remote I O system configured the MELSECNET II composite mode and that of a remote 1 0 system configured in the MELSECNET mode 7 51 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNETI MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS Applicability MELSEC A 9 3 I O system assignment When setting link parameters of a local remote system consider the following points for assignment 1 2 Link relay assignment For link relay B determine an assigned range for each of master and local stations Refer to Section 7 4 3 a Examine the link relay B assignment range with the first and
89. instruction is used the RFRP instruction will not be executed correctly 3 Reset and initialize YnE and the RFRP execution start signal after the execution is completed When failing to do so reading cannot be executed again 4 Refer to the manual for each special function module for addresses where each data of the special function module is stored 9 es 5 7 Write error detection circuit Sequence program to check the operation from error occurrence to initial communication completion when an error occurs to a local or remote I O station a Whether an error has occurred in a local or remote station or not can be determined by 1 0 of bit corresponding to the specified station of D9228 to 09231 When the bit corresponding to the specified station is 1 it means that an error Occurs b Whether the initial communication is being executed or not be determined c by 1 0 of bit corresponding to the specified station of D9224 to D9227 When the bit corresponding to the specified station is 1 it means that initial communication is being executed The occurrence of an error and the execution of initial communication in a local station or a remote station are detected in the following timing Detection of normal condition Error detection K __ Initial communication completion initial communication detecti
90. instruction setting Faulty setting of the LRDP instruction constant source and or target The designated station is not executing data link processing Corresponding station error LRDP instruction cannot be executed by the corresponding station A remote station is connected to the station designated with the LRDP instruction or a local station of the QCPU specified by LRDP instruction is in STOP status Stores the execution result of an LWTP word device write instruction M9203 ON LWTP instruction setting amp Faulty setting of the LWTP instruction constant source and or target The designated station is not executing data link processing Corresponding station error LWTP instruction cannot be executed by the correspopnding E A remote I O station is connected to the station designated with the LWTP instruction or a local station of the QCPU specified by LWTP instruction is in STOP status 9 Device Name D9202 D9203 09241 09242 Local station link type MELSEC A Table 9 5 List of MELSECNET special link registers Continued Data Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 Description Stores whether a slave station is compatible with the MELSECNET mode or MELSE
91. link system 2 10 MELSECNET B data link system 3 7 Three tier System using the MELSECNET data link system 4 6 Three tier System using the MELSECNET B data Ta SY ECCE aus 4 29 Differences between QCPU and A QnACPU local Stations 1 11 E ERROR CED d 10 25 F Fault detection function 5 24 Forward loop 1 8 21 auyeie T 5 4 L Link data communication processing 6 1 6 17 Link data during a communication error 6 5 Link parameters 7 11 Using MELSECNET Il composite mode T 7 14 7 48 MELSEC A Using MELSECNET II mode 7 12 7 42 Using MELSECNET mode 7 11 7 24 Link refresh execution timing 6 2 Link refresh 8 6 12 Link 5 29 7 21 Link relay 5 29 7 20 Local station 1 3 Local remote system assignment 7 52 Loopback function 5 20 M Master 1 3 2 1 3 1 Maximum number of link points
92. local station AJ71AP21 R21 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU CPU QO2CPU module QO2CPU Used only for local M uices stations link QO6HCPU e Installed in an I O module O12HCPU slot in an extension base unit Q25HCPU A1SHCPU A2SHCPU A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AT21 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 ids Use the station A2NCPU AJ71AT21B number setting Switch A2NCPU S1 to set the selection of A3NCPU master or local station 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 3 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available x system MELSECNET B data link MELSECNET data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET VOCA MELSECNET MELSECNET is II composite II composite mode mode mode mode AJ71AT21B Installed in an slot in an base unit Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU IQdAACPU QO2HCPU A SJ71AT21 QO6HCPU A QO2CPU Used only for local 2 i SAONE Installed in an I O Q12HCPU slot in an extension Q25HCPU base unit 0 2 25 53 Data link module 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 3 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available x system MELSECNET B data link MELSECNET data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Module Model MELSECNET M
93. master station is turned ON B60 ON OFF instruction for Y70 of local station No 3 K10 rio T10 times out 1 second after BO is turned ON BO is turned ON OFF by the master sio station bos YCO and 60 ON when T10 times out 060 Local station No 3 program Turn Y70 and BEO ON 1 second after B60 of the local station No 2 is turned ON and turn Y70 BEO OFF when B60 is turned OFF BEO ON OFF instruction for Y140 and BO of the master station 8060 sale rao T20 times out 1 second after B60 is turned ON B60 is turned ON OFF by local station No 2 all Turns Y70 and BEO ON when T20 times out T20 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 9 P ROG RAM M N G Applicability rr 9 6 Data Link Program Using Link Registers W The following describes a program where the link register contents 0 to 10 written by the master station are read by the local station No 2 and YDO to YD2 are turned ON OFF according to the contents System configuration For MELSECNET data link system um station station Local station Local station Remote I O station 2 3 No 4 X30 X20 X80 AN Y30 Y70 Y80 ei potis SO OIS PU O AJ72 21 j P25 X7F XAF XSF is XaF xoF Y9F Yar Y7F yor 0 Y130 0 Y120 n
94. module is mounted is effective for preventing noise b When connecting disconnecting a coaxial cable be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system 8 9 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNETII MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION CHEN USE RN ee TT MELSEC A 8 4 2 Optical fiber cables connections This section describes methods for connecting optical fiber cables with link modules 1 Connecting link modules with optical fiber cables Connect an optical fiber cable to a link module from the OUT connector to IN connector of the next station as shown in Fig 8 6 Connect the cable from the OUT connector of the final station to the IN connector of the master station Master station No 1 No 2 I L Ll l Send Receive Send in Receive in Send in Receive in forward loop forward loop forward loop forward loop forward loop forward loop Receive in Send in Receive in Send in Receive in Send in reverse loop reverse loop reverse loop reverse loop reverse loop reverse loop Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable Fig 8 6 Connecting link modules with optical fiber cables 2 Connecting optical fiber cables The following flowchart shows a method for connecting optical fiber cables
95. of the master station and inputs X of a local station and the inputs X of the master station and outputs Y of a local station Remote station assignment a Assign the range of module installed in the remote I O station Set it in units of 16 points b Assign the link registers W to read write the special function modules installed to the remote I O station REMARK The GPP link parameter setting screen is shown below SLAVE M ALL L W D T INTER MASTER PC FOR LINK MITTENT STATIONS B w 10m 10ms 000 27F 000 2BF 300 341 360 39F 680 77F 230 59F 600 77F 200 4BF gt gt lt lt lt 50 Ttiltf itt m rx r x mxmrr lt lt gt gt 2 5 pw w w v w 230 30F 030 10 200 28 000 08F 100 17F 100 17F 680 6FF 200 27F 600 67F 280 2FF 200 27F 200 2BF 700 77F 200 27F 700 77F 200 27F 320 341 380 39F 480 59F 080 19F 400 4BF 000 08F t MASTER L LOCAL R REMOTE LOCAL REMOTE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS Applicability MELSEC A 7 4 2 Link parameters to be set for the MELSECNET II mode When the MELSECNET II mode is used two types of link parameter first half and second half are provided The system can be operated in the ME
96. or local station A2ACPU S1 CPU A3ACPU e Installed in an I O module A2UCPU slot in a base A2UCPU S1 unit A3UCPU AJ71AT21B Q2ACPU S1 QO2HCPU A 15 71 21 GozHCP Used only for local stations iuc E installed in an I O slot in an extension base unit Data ink ATSJ71T25B 0 ASST module AJ72T25B REMARK 1 The definitions of L m station 2 station and r station in Table 4 4 are as follows a L m station Local station in the second tier master station in the third tier b 2 station Local station in the third tier c r station Remote station in the third tier 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 4 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available PF Applicablesystem system MELSECNET Bdatalink data link Module Model MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Remarks MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite II composite mode mode mode mode CPU module with link function 1 A2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AT21B A2USHCPU S1 A1SJ71AT21B Q2ASCPU A1SJ71AT21B Q2ACPU S1 A1SJ71AT21B A1SJ71 1 2 TTA Q2ASHCPU AT21B A1SJ71AT21B Q2ASHCPU S1 A1SJ71AT21B Q02CPU A Use the station A1SJ71AT21B number setting QO2HCPU A 2 to set the A1SJ71AT21B selection of master or local QO6HCPU A NM SS Installed in an t ner I O slot in a ba
97. output modules installed to the remote stations are turned OFF Step 0 Sequence program END Step 0 END Step 0 execution by master station Link refresh Link data communications Link Step 0 Step 0 refresh END Z END execution by local Y20 FF rk station Link scan time Master station is determined to be operating normally when the link scan is executed within the set monitoring time Sequence program END Fig 7 5 Monitoring Time REMARK 1 For details of data link special register refer to Section 9 3 2 For details of data link special relay refer to Section 9 2 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es 3 Setting the monitoring time The monitoring time can be set between 10 to 2000ms in units of 10ms The usual setting is 20005 Setting the minimum value to monitoring time is valid for the case to immediately turn off the output of remote stations where communication error occurred Use the following procedure to set the minimum value to monitoring time a Set 200 2000ms to monitoring time and write the setting to the master station b Perform data link in the actual system and monitor the link scan by link monitor of GPP connected to the master station Refer to Section 10 1 1 for the link monitor c Turn off the power supply to one of the slave stations so that the system operates in the loopback mode d Read the maximum link scan time value
98. r Received in reverse loop 5 Sent in reverse loop Station No 1 Forward loop Loopback Station No 2 Station No 3 Disconnected Station No 5 stations Fig 5 6 Data link when forward reverse loop is faulty When one master station and eight slave stations are used 5 22 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 5 Data link when a power failure occurs to local station or remote station If the data link is disabled due to power failure at a local station or a remote I O station the link loops back toward the master station and the data link is maintained by the normally operating stations The station where the power failure occurred is disconnected from the data link When the power supply to the disconnected station is turned on the data link in the forward loop recovers Whether the station will remain disconnected or return to the data link is depending on the setting of the automatic return function Refer to section 5 3 3 There is a power failure at station No 5 Master station Station No 1 Station No 8 2 Data link forward loop Station No 7 Station No 2 Station No 6 Station No 3 Station No 5 Station No 4 Data link station Th R Received in forward loop Loopback data link S Sent in forward loop Master station r Received in reverse loop 5 Sent reverse loop Station No 1 Forward loop Loopback Power OFF Station
99. receive data Range where 01 can send data Local station No 2 7 2 in third tier 1 1 The 22 station writes data to the devices in the range of B W1CO to 1FF and sends it to the other stations When B1CO is turned ON in the 2 2 station for example B1CO in other stations are also turned ON Except for 2 1 2 2 stations 2 The 2 2 station can receive data written to the devices in the range of B WO to 1BF by other stations 3 Devices in the range of B W200 to 3FF can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B W0 100 180 1 0200 280 2CO 300 380 Lim 1 22 Lam 211 22 13 HIM Range where 2 can receive data Range where 02 can send data 5 SPECIFICATIONS es Local station No 1 2 1 in third tier 2 1 The 21 station writes data to the devices in the range of B W280 to 2BF and sends it to other stations When B280 is turned ON in the 271 station for example B280 in other stations are also turned ON Except for 2 1 and 2 2 stations 2 The 21 station can receive data written to the devices in the range of B WO to FF B W200 to 27F and B W2CO to 2FF by other station 3 Devices in the range of B W100 to 1FF and B W300 to 3FF can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B WO 100 180 1CO 200 280 2 0 300 380 1 22 Lam 21 72 jm Range where 1 can receive data
100. registers W is B WO to 3FF 1024 points when a MELSECNET II compatible data link module is connected to the local station MELSECNET mode X Y to 7FF 2048 points B 0OtoFFF 4096 points W 0Oto FFF 4096 points MELSECNET composite mode X Y to 2048 points 0OtoFFF 4096 points W 0Oto FFF 4096 points The data link range for link relays B and link registers W that can be data linked by the MELSECNET compatible local station is B WO to 3FF 1024 points 1 OVERVIEW es F 5 Link parameter types and the number of link points per station a MELSECNET mode 1 Link parameter is only one type 2 Maximum number of link points per station Master station and local station 1024 bytes station Remote I O station 512 bytes station I O is 512 points of X YO to per station MELSECNET II mode 1 Link parameter Link parameter is divided into two types first second half link parameter Data link is also possible by setting the first half link parameter only 2 Maximum link points per station For stations with only first half link parameters set Master station and local station 1024 bytes station For stations with both first and second link parameters set Master station and local station 2048 bytes station MELSECNET composite mode 1 Link parameter Link parameter is divided into two types first second half link parameter When setting first half link pa
101. remote station input output allocation error D9221 9 22 9 MELSEC A Table 9 6 List of MELSECNET B special link registers Continued Device ue Name Data Description Number e Stores station Nos of local stations or remote I O stations communicating initial setting data for data link processing into the corresponding bits in D9224 to D9227 as shown below Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 BEWEE NUMBER n b14 b13 bi2 b11 b10 be fbe 56 bs b4 ba b2 bt Initial D9224 ume URIS URI4 LR13IURI2 L9 LRT LRE LRS juna URS JUR2 09225 o mer n2e mas 23 me m2 R20 Leto UR t8 RIT communication D9224 between local When a local stations remote stations is communicating initial stations remote setting data link parameters the bit corresponding to the station stations number is set Example When No 23 is communicating initial setting data link D9225 ters 1 is set to bit 6 of 09225 ram I No 17 to No 31 para eee I When D9225 is monitored its value is 64 40 When the initial setting data has been communicated the bit is automatically reset to O Stores the number of the local stations remote stations in the data link that is determined by a master station to be faulty A station is determined to be faulty if the data returned from it to the master
102. remote stations take to determine whether the master station is operating normally For details refer to Section 7 5 4 Operation mode in the MELSECNET data link system Operation mode is determined according to the type of link module which is connected to the MELSECNET data link system and link parameter setting For details refer to Section 1 2 4 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM es 2 2 3 Applicable modules The following describes link modules which be used the MELSECNET 1 Data link module using optical fiber cable The data link modules that can be connected with optical fiber cable are listed in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 Data Link Modules Connectable with Optical Fiber Cable O Applicable Applicable Applicable system optical Two tier system Module Model fiber cable Description MELSECNET MELSECNET Remarks t MELSECNET mode mode composite mode BRENNEN ADJ2HCPUP21 C ATNCPUP21 A1NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 em CPU module with the link A2NCPUP21 S3 O junction A2NCPUP21 S11 SO Use the station CPU o number setting module A3NCPUP21 SO switch to set the selection of master 21 53 o or local station A2ACPUP21 SO A2ACPUP21 S3 Jo AZACPUP21 S1 SO CPU module with the link A2ACPUP21 S4 A3ACPUP21 SO A3ACPUP21 S3 o Module for data link used A1SJ71AP21 U with any of the
103. second half parameters If O point is assigned to the first half link parameters assignment to the second half link parameters can be started with BOOO Link relays BO Assigned with the flrst Can be read by the master half of the link parameters station and all local stations nE 3FF4 1 Assigned with the second be read by the MELSECNET 1 half of the link parameters compatible stations only BFFF MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET I composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS j CL RU E PUE MELSEC A 7 6 3 Determining the link register W assignment range Link registers W are used for communications between the master station and a local station and between the master station and a remote I O station Assign the link register in units of 1 point Assign the link registers to the area for communications between the master and a local station and the area for communications between the master and a remote I O station separately as shown below 1 When assigning the link parameters of the MELSECNET mode and the first half link parameters of the MELSECNET II composite mode a The area used by the master or local station to write data to host station hereinafter referred to as the M L area b The area used to read write from the special function module installed to a remote station RFRP RTO
104. set the master station to the STOP state Set station n to the station to station mode master Set the mode switch to 5 Set station n 1 to the station to station mode slave Set the mode switch to 6 Reset station 1 then reset station n Execute the station to station test The station to station test is executed about seven seconds after resetting Determine the station to station test results COMPLETE 3 Testresult The LEDs indicate the test result The descriptions of the LEDs are as follows a Normal The following LEDs flash in order CRC OVER AB IF TIME DATA UNDER b Error The corresponding LEDs turn ON and the test is discontinued 1 When the F LOOP and TIME LEDs turn ON a The forward loop cable is broken b The sending and receiving ends of the forward loop are not connected with a cable 2 When the F LOOP R LOOP and TIME LEDs turn ON a The reverse loop cable is broken b The sending and receiving ends of the reverse loop are not connected with a cable c The sending end of the forward loop is connected to the sending end of the reverse loop and the receiving end of the forward loop is connected to the receiving end of the reverse loop 3 When an ERROR LED other than 1 and 2 turns ON a Hardware error b The cable was disconnected during the test C A cable was broken during the test MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET
105. sta Are the station numbers stored 09205 09206 secutive YES The cable connecting the station stored in D9205 and the station stored in D9206 is faulty Forward loop send line hardware error or reverse loop receive line hardware error for the station stored in D9205 Forward loop send line hardware error or reverse loop receive line hardware error for the station stored in D9206 10 13 tion and the faulty line in n forward reverse loop ine What is the data stored in D9228 to D9231 Not 0 Forward loop line hardware error or reverse loop line hardware error for the station stored in D9232 to D9239 station num ber setting error or mode select switch set ting error 0 The cable in the for ward loop line or reverse loop line for the station stored in 09232 to 09239 is faulty MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING sea CU MELSEC A 10 3 Procedure for Troubleshooting The following describes the simple procedure for troubleshooting 10 3 1 Troubleshooting flowchart ERROR OCCURRENCE Is the POWER LED on the power supply module lit OFF Refer to the troubleshooting section in the manual of the link mod
106. station for the third tier Local station Remote 1 0 No 2 L2 Ramote 1O station station No 4 R4 Master station L3 m Local station No 1 7 1 No 2 r2 Local station No 3 21 5 1 Read Reading word data 2 Write Writing word data 3 Used as a data register D in the master station 4 Read from master station 5 Write from master station O Usable range Fig 7 46 Link registers W assignment example Continued 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 5 Inputs outputs Y a Amemory map for the assignment example of inputs and outputs is shown in Fig 7 47 Master f station Remote Local station Local station A3ACPUP21 station No 1 2 A3ACPUP21 No 3 A3ACPUP21 XYOO0 Number of X000 M Y030 XY000 Number of XY0001 Number of points e xos x X MR points points used by the OY Y yt2F used by the used by the host staion host staion 19F host staion Link Link inputs outputs 09 Y Usable link range Link Link inputs outputs X 1 Setting for station 1 2 Setting for station 4 Details Lower link local Lower link Lower link local station No 1 remote I O station No 3 A3ACPUP21 station No 2 A2NCPUP21 Number of I O points used by the host staion Number of I O points used by the host staion t OFF Usable ry li k Link Link in dCF inputs outputs range X Y W
107. station is not received within the specified length of Stores the status of i D9228 time NUMBER b15 b14 613 b12 b11 bi bo 57 be bs 64 bs b2 bt bo D9229 o 7 26 5251 5241 231 2 211520 619 8 8 17 e When data is not received within the specified length of time the Local station bit corresponding to the station number of the local station remote station remote station is set Example When error at 3 causes it to fail to return the data to the master station 1 is set for bit 2 of D9228 When D9228 is monitored its value is 4 When the loop line becomes faulty 1 is set for the bits of the Stores the status of stations after the fault or for all local stations remote I O stations No 17 to No 31 e When the master station becomes faulty or the setting for the monitoring time is too small 1 is set for the bits corresponding to all local stations remote stations When the faulty station returns to normal the bit is automatically reset to O Stores the number of times that the following errors are detected in the loop line currently being used Receive error Stores the total number of CRC AB IF OVER detection count receive errors Counting stops if the number of receive error occurrences exceeds the maximum limit FFFFu Execute the reset operation to clear the data to O
108. supply to a slave station is turned off the affected slave station is disconnected from the data link so that normal link operations are able to continue for other stations In the MELSECNET data link system the optical fiber cables or coaxial cables are doubled to make the loopback function possible This double configuration allows data link operations to continue by switching the loop from forward to reverse if a cable breaks or the power to a slave station is turned off Refer to Section 5 3 4 b Automatic return function d If an error occurs in a slave station the corresponding station is disconnected from the data link system When slave station local station remote station is disconnected from the link due to an occurrence of a problem it is automatically connected into the link when the station recovers the normal operating conditions Refer to Section 5 3 3 Error detection 1 The data link operation status is stored in special relays M and special registers D in a programmable controller CPU Read these special relays M and special registers D to check the data link operation status 2 Use the link monitor function of a peripheral device AGGPP AGPHP to check the data link operation status Self diagnostics function The self diagnostics function checks the link module hardware the optical fiber cable or coaxial cable connection status etc REMARK The errors that make t
109. the data D200 to D209 to mov ozoo wessww W255 to W25E dein bid Writes the data W255 to W25E of the master station to addresses 0 to 9 of Resets and initializes handshake sig 9 MELSEC A Executed always while the start signal is ON To execute an To execute RTOP instruction while the start signal is instruction while the start To execute RTOP instruction while the start signal is is ON PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE M9037 Detects an error in remote I O station No 4 when b3 of 09228 is 1 Detects parameter transfer of remote I O Check whether communication with remote station No 4 is normal station No 4 Error processing Parameters are being sent when b3 of D9224 is 1 lt gt Ko Do E Turns M10 ON when an error is found in remote I O station No 4 or during Reset the hand shake signal for the parameter transfer RFRP and RTOP instructions Resets handshake signals Y58E YnE and Y58F YnF if a communication error occurs during execution of RFRP or RTOP instruction at remote I O station No 4 wc mioo e Start signal 2 58 Y58FX59E X59F Turns M1 ON if the start signal is turned SET ON while RFRP instruction RTOP instruction is not being executed Stores the data in D200 to D209 to W255 to W25E Writes the data in W255 to W25E of the mas
110. the final address will cause an error in the master station The range to be assigned differs depending on the order of the M L area and the M R area set by the link parameters a Ifthe M L area is assigned after the M R area it is not necessary to assign inputs and outputs to the local station setting range Refer to Fig 7 48 a b If the M L area is assigned after the M R area it is necessary to assign inputs and outputs to the local station setting range Refer to Fig 7 48 b Assignment range Assignment range for the master station for the master station 000 000 Number of Number of I O points used by the points used by the master station master station assignment setting range Empty area Empty area assignment Empty area Empty area Empty area Empty area a b Fig 7 48 I O assignment setting range REMARK In the I O assignment setting the device range is set with the assumption that the input modules or output modules are installed in the area of M L area or that empty slots exist in the empty area range marked by Fig 7 48 7 81 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 2 As for I O assignment of remote I O station a slot in which a module is installed cannot be assigned as an empty slot 51 0 point 52 16 points 53 32 points 54 48 points 55 64 points If assigned to an empty slot a UNIT VERIFY ERROR will occur 1 1 1 2 1
111. the status of NUMBER o15 b1a b19 o12 b1i o10 be be ur os os Toa us Tee bo No 1 to No 16 Local station error operating station is set to 1 The bit status of remote station detection status always remains 0 Example When No 5 detects that No 4 is faulty 1 is set to bit 4 of D9216 When D9216 is monitored its value is 16 D9217 Stores the status of 10 No 17 to No 31 When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operating status the corresponding bit is automatically reset to o e Stores the numbers of the stations at which a link parameter error sent from the master station is detected by another local or remote station Stores the status of D9220 aaa Local station aa in NUMBER 515 614 613 6121611 b10 bg be 67 bs b5 ba 1 b2 mismatched or 16 15114 113 12111 10 us LR ELIR LR LR LR LR L R LR L IRL R L R 31 30 28 28 27 26 25124 23 122 21 20 119 18 s Example When local station No 5 is set as a remote I O station in Stores the status of the link parameter settings 1 is set to bit 4 of D9220 No 17 to No 31 When 09220 is monitored its value is 16 10 When the link parameter settings is corrected and the status of the master station is switched from STOP to RUN the bit is automatically reset to O
112. the upper tier and lower tier are checked Turned ON when the link card hardware is faulty Turned ON when the master station is offline in the station to station test mode or in the self loopback test mode Turned OFF when the master station is reset after being placed in the online mode 9 Device Number M9232 M9233 M9235 M9236 M9237 Local station operating status Local station error detected Local station parameter error detected Local station initial communications status Local station error MELSEC A Table 9 2 MELSECNET B special link relays list Continued Description RUN or ON OFF status depends on the operation status of the local station STEP RUN Turned ON when the status of any local station the loop changes to status STOP or PAUSE STOP or Turned OFF automatically when the status of all local stations changes to PAUSE RUN or STEP RUN That is M9232 is turned OFF when bits D9212 to status D9215 are all OFF Turned ON when local station in the executed loop detects an error in No error another station M9255 ON Error Automatically turned OFF when the faulty station is returned to the normal detected state That is M9233 is turned OFF when bits D9216 to D9219 are all OFF e Turned ON when the bit device range link relays and link registers outside No error the range allocated to a master station for the low
113. transferring link device data between the data link module MELSECNET and network module MELSECNET 10 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 1 Default values The default values of the network refresh parameters are assigned according to the setting of the number of modules No settings are required unless specific changes must be made to the default values Table 7 1 shows the default values The module Nos correspond to the numbers in the setting of the number of modules When MELSECNET II data link module is mounted it is always assigned to the area of module No 1 If two MELSECNET II data link modules are mounted they assigned to the area for one module Table 7 1 Default values of network refresh parameters Number of mounted modules Module No 1 Module No 2 LB LWO to FFF B WO to FFF LX LYO to X YO to 1 4 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS mm ar cr m r rr When MELSECNET II data link module is mounted the default values of the network refresh parameters are assigned as follows 1 Always assigned to the area of module No 1 2 two MELSECNET II data link modules are mounted they are assigned to the area for one module 3 The MELSECNET II data link module is not refreshed since it does not have SB SW The data link information of the MELSECNET II is stored into M D9200 to 9255 4 LX LYOOO to of the MELSECNET II is assigned to the area of 000 to For
114. turned ON OFF when monitored Are the local station link ne X turned N OFF when monitored YES Check the link parameter Sequence program error assignment Correct the sequence program 10 20 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A Data link is impossible for link relays B and link registers W Set the master station and local stations to the STOP status Monitor the sequence program of the receive station Forcibly turn ON the link relays B of the send station in the test mode or write data to the link registers W link relays B in the receive station turned ON or is data written to the link registers W YES Sequence program error Correct the sequence program NO YES Change the link parameter setting or change the device numbers in the sequence program Is there any incorrect link parameter assigned NO YES Is the entire data link system disabled Refer to Section 10 3 2 NO Hefer to Section 10 3 3 10 21 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A Data link is disabled for link application instructions Check the master station sequence program for errors Is there an error in the sequence program YES Correct the sequence program NO YES Refer to Section 10 3 2 Is the station in question discon nected NO Is the station in question a remote 1 station Is there any incorrect link p
115. types of link parameters are set for the third tier The consistency check is executed on the first half link parameters including the MELSECNET mode for the second tier and the first half link parameters for the third tier The second half link parameters for the third tier are checked whether or not to begin after the final device number assigned with the first half link parameters for the second tier c When the range of link relays B and link registers W is extended turning M9208 and M9209 ON to use the consistency check will not be executed Make sure that the link parameters assigned to the third tier are not also assigned to the second tier B WO FFF Link ters f Device range assigned with the Device range assigned with the first half link parameters second half link parameters I I l i 1 t t Link parameters for the third tier Device range assigned with the first Device range assigned with the half link parameters for the third tier second half link parameters for the third tier Fig 7 34 Assignment when link relay B and link register W range is extended MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mposite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS rr 7 10 2 Using the MELSECNET mode in the second tier The link relay B and link register W range which can be assigned to the third tier is described per operati
116. 0 4 29 5 SPECIFICATIONS 0 1t05 42 5 1 General 5 1 5 2 Performance Specifications 5 2 53 FunctiOnS essesoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo 5 3 1 Cyclic transmission function 5 G 5 32 Transient transmission FUNCTION 999 966 0 00 0 0 00 000 00 00 00000000000000 D 1G 533 Automatic return function 9 9966 6 0 000000 0000 000000000000000000000 00 0 D 19 5 3 4 Loopback function 5 20 535 Fault detection function B 24
117. 0 T A P AJ72 EK XS pula AJ72 XAF T25B d Pot T T T25B 21 B X4F X9F XBF Y7F XIF X9F X2F v7F Y9F YAO Y120 Y150 YAF Y12F Y16F X12F Y140 190 Y200 Yi30 Y190 Y15F Y19F 17 Y20F Y14F Y19F Y13F YAAF Input module Output module Special function module 007 Fig 9 3 System configuration 9 30 9 MELSEC A Link device assignment 000 15F 000 186 200 294 300 3C1 260 47F 580 7FF 1A0 3BF 500 76F 10ms B lt W e gt W e Y Y X DX lt lt 55250 060 18F OEO 15F 0 100 186 700 7FF 390 47F 260 36F 580 6AF 030 12F 250 33F 1B0 2BF 080 1AF 6D0 76F 1A0 25F 2A0 3BF 500 5BF 000 09F 210 2CF 300 41F 000 MASTER LOCAL H REMOTE L LOCAL H REMOTE Fig 9 4 Link device assignment 9 es Program example Master station program Turn 140 BO ON when T1 times out and turn Y140 and BO OFF 1 second after BEO is turned ON BO ON OFF instruction for YCO of local station No 2 BEES TO times out 1 second after BEO is turned ON BEO is turned ON OFF by local station No 3 T1 times out 1 second after TO is turned OFF Turns Y140 and BO ON when T1 times out Local station No 2 program Turn YCO and B60 ON 1 second after BO of the
118. 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000cccccc 25 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 14 Flowchart for when the data link is disabled throughout the entire system 9996 1 15 Flowchart for when the data link is disabled at a specific station 999 1 17 Flowchart for when the data communication error Occurs 10 19 Flowchart for when the unspecified number of slave stations become faulty 1 0 24 10 5 Replacing a Faulty Station of Link Module 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000ccccccc 1 26 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 ABOUT MANUALS The following manual is also related to this product Order it by referring to the table below as necessary Related manual Manual No Manual name Model code MELSECNET MELSECNET B Local Station Data Link Module User s Manual This manual explains specifications functions preparatory procedures before operation programming and troubleshooting of the MELSECNET MELSECNET B local station data link module SH 080670ENG 13JR98 Sold separately COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring
119. 1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 4 51 520 Q2ACPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 R21 4 53 TB CPU AJPIAPZISSyRZ A9TAP21 S3YRZI 3 Remote stations Use the following formula to calculate the I O refresh time o3 required for a remote O station X a3 Krai KR2 Model KR1 KR2 AJ72P25 S3YR25 98 08 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME es When MELSECNET B data link system is used 1 Master station Use the following formula to calculate the link refresh time a1 required for a master station When the link operates the MELSECNET II mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode the number of B W points is all of the points set with the first half and second half link parameters B Xo Yo K x 2048 3 1024 KMt1 Ku2 Kus CPU module Link module ATSCPU A1SJCPU S3 1 34 6 47 A2SCPU 12 12 88 ATSHCPU ATSJHCPU A1SJ71AT21B AZSHCPU 5 6 A2USHCPU S Master on for G2ASCPUGST station for GZASHCPUGS the second KM1 2 ms A3UCPU A4UCPU Q2ACPU S1 A1SJ71AT21B Em 9 2 94 AJ71AT21B 08 AJ71AT21B 2 4 At the master station for the third tier link refresh processings for local stations for the second tier and master station for the third tier are executed 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME mmn rn Jm 2 Local stations Use the following form
120. 1AP22 PC9800 A98BD J71AP22 AnACPUP21 R21 AnACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUP21 S4 Data link modules that can be used as a local station MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode composite mode AnACPUP21 R21 AnACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUP21 S4 AnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnUCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 QnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QCPU A A1SJ71AP21 R21 A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 AnACPUP21 R21 AnACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUP21 S4 AnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnUCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 QnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QCPU A A1SJ71AP21 R21 QCPU A1SJ71AP23Q R23Q A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 AnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnUCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 QnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnSCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 AnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QCPU A A1SJ71AP21 R21 QCPU A1SJ71AP23Q R23Q A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 A2CCPUP21 R21 owe Kama eet oe Parameter first half Device range 9 Parameter second Link parameter type Master local station Max 1024 bytes station number of link points per station Remote I O station Setting of first 2 types Link parameters first and second halves 1024 bytes half only station Setting of both first and second halves 2048 bytes station 512 bytes station 512 points X YO to 1FF station 2 types Link parameters first and second halves Setting of first half only
121. 2 The L1 m station can receive data written to the devices in the B WO to B WFF range and the B W180 to 37F range by other stations 3 Devices in the B W380 to 3FF range can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B WO 100 180 1 0 200 280 2 0 300 380 3 Lim 4112 Lam 21 221 13 W Range where data can be received range where data can be sent Range where 1 1 m can receive Range where L1 m can send data REMARK 1 To simplify the example the same number is assigned to link relays B and link registers W In actual use the number can be separately assigned to link relays B and link registers W 2 indicates the range where data can be received 5 SPECIFICATIONS n si 9 1 The L2 m station writes data to the devices the B W200 to 27F range and sends to other stations When B200 is turned ON in the L2 m station for example B200 in other stations are also turned ON Except for 2 1 and 2 2 stations 2 L2 m station can receive data written to the devices in the range of B WO to 1FF and B W280 to 37F by other station 3 Devices in the range of B W380 to 3FF can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B WO i00 180 1CO 200 280 2CO 300 380 Lim 41142 L2 m 21 22 t3 W 9 R Range where data be received range where data can
122. 2 When 09232 is monitored its value is 256 100 D9237 Stores the status of This error will have been caused by one of the following No 41 to No 48 a A faulty connection of the forward loop cable connecting No 4 and No 5 b A fault of the forward loop receiver of link module on No 5 ekstasi A fault of the forward loop transmitter of link module on D9238 No 49 to No 56 Didi With errors other than loop line errors such as hardware errors and data communication errors only the error involved with the loop line currently being used will be detected The error status is retained D9239 Stores the status of When data link is executed again with the loop line in which an No 57 to No 64 error was detected the bit data is automatically reset to 0 provided that the fault has been removed Stores the number of times that the following errors are detected in the loop line currently being used Receive error Stores the total number of AB IF OVER detection count receive error occurrences Counting stops if the number of receive error occurrences D9240 exceeds the maximum limit FFFFu Execute the reset operation to clear the data to O 9 MELSEC A Table 9 6 List of MELSECNET B special link registers Device Name Data Description Number target Corresponding station error The designated station is not L RDP cannot be executed in the corres
123. 2 Precautions when operating the data link system The following describes the precautions for performing data link 1 Number of link device points for one station Note that the number of link device X Y B W points that can be used at a local station and a remote station is limited For details refer to Section 7 3 2 Link parameter setting oet the link parameters in the master station to perform data link The link parameters include the number of slave stations connected in the MELSECNET B data link system the link device assignment and the watchdog monitoring time a Number of slave stations The total number of the local stations and remote stations connected to the MELSECNET B data link system b Link device assignment The range of link data communications is set at each master station local station and remote station For details refer to Chapter 7 c Monitoring time It is used for local stations and remote I O stations to judge whether a master station is operating normally For details refer to Section 7 5 3 The operating mode of a MELSECNET B data link system The operating mode is determined by the type of link modules connected to the MELSECNET B data link system and the link parameter settings For details refer to oection 1 2 4 4 Shielded twisted pair cable The shielded twisted pair cable used for the MELSECNET B data link syste
124. 3 082 454 o a y a A iY TT EE AnNCPUP21 R21 AJ71AP21 S3 R21 1 2 A2ACPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3yR21 4 32 515 Master A2UCPUGST AST TAP2T S3YR21 4 32 statin for LL ASUCPU FATTAPZNSS R2I 048 082 416 NO 2274 A4UCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 4 16 402 417 Q2ACPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 R21 5 26 Q3ACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 5 83 CPU AJTIAPZNSSyRZ Two types of link refresh link refresh of a local station for the second tier and link refresh of a master station for the third tier are executed for the master station for the third tier 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME mmn rn Jm 2 Local stations Use the following formula to calculate the link refresh time o2 required for a local station When the link operates in the MELSECNET II mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode the number of B W points is all points set with the first half and second half link parameters B X1 Yi 1 W 2048 1024 co KL2 x Model KL1 KL2 KL3 30 RZNCPUPZNSS RZNS 018 148 ASNCPUPZNSS RZI 048 014 109 ANCPUPZURZIrAJTTAPZNSSURZI 08 12 84 AJTIAPZT SS RZ ss 515 A2UCPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 R21 4 32 A4UCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 4 16 505 553 SPSS 82 RSP ATSITIAPZVRZ 576 386 505 441 Q2ASCPU S
125. 341 230 59F lt lt 22520 lt r xrx r r 200 4BF Tn a 300 310 360 36F 230 30F 030 10F 200 28F 000 08F 320 341 380 39F 480 59F 080 19F 400 4BF 000 0BF t M MASTER L LOCAL REMOTE L LOCAL REMOTE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET I MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode MELSEC A 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS Applicability 7 7 3 Local remote I O system assignment and link parameter setting example The following describes the assignment of link relays link registers inputs and outputs and the link parameters Assignment for a local remote I O system When setting link parameters of local remote I O system consider the following points for assignment 1 Determine the link relay B link register W assignment range for each master station and local station Refer to Section 7 6 2 and Section 7 6 3 Determine the assignment range dividing M L area into the one for the master station and the one for the local station 2 When special function module is installed to a remote I O station link registers W are required for reading writing RFRP RTOP instruction buffer memory area is divided into the area for R and the area for M R to assign Refer to Section 7 6 3 Divide link registers W into the M L area for communicat
126. 360 3A4 3E3 250 47F 4 0 7 1A0 36F 4B0 70F SECOND M gt ALLL 500 5FF SLAVE PC STATIONS gt T d a m mn nmrerr r lt lt M L R gt 1 600 67F 680 77F 600 67F 680 77F MASTER L LOCAL R REMOTE PRESS SSN TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RANGE OF B W 1 L LOCAL R REMOTE MELSECNET II LOCAL 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A c First half link parameters for the third tier 180 2FF 1 0 35 680 77F 680 7FF 000 021 022 041 3B0 57F 600 78F 300 57F 5A0 65F MN SLAVE PC STATIONS xx lt lt SEE0S0 rrr r lt lt 5050 t 2 0 35 3B0 4AF 600 78F 4B0 57F 250 34F 060 1EF 100 1CF 300 41F 5A0 65F 480 57 1A0 2BF 000 100 1 280 2 MASTER L LOCAL 1 Eo PRESS lt SSN gt TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RANGE OF B W REMOTE MELSECNET I LOCAL d Second half link parameters for the third tier MELSECNET II MULTI MODE LINK 180 2EF 1E0 35F 680 77F 680 7FF 000 021 022 041 3B0 57F 600 78F 300 57 5A0 65F 1111111111 INTER MITTENT 10ms SLAVE PC STATIONS xx lt lt 55050 1 lt lt 5050 SECOND L poe w MASTER L LOCAL PRESS SSN TO SELE
127. 5 3 6 Self diagnostics function eseeeeee eese eee eee o eee eee eee eee eese eese eoe eseseceseesecceceseecececeseseeces 5 28 5 3 7 Extensive use of link relays and link registers W in a three tier system 99990000 5 29 5 3 8 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET composite mode D 32 5 4 Optical Fiber Cable Specifications 5 36 5 4 1 SI Gl type optical fiber cable eeeeeeee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee eee ee esee eese seo eoeecececsccccesscccseses 5 36 5 5 Coaxial Cable Specifications 5 37 5 5 1 Coaxial cable 5 lt 37 552 Connector for the coaxial cable 99 966 0 00000000000000000000 000000000000000000 0 B _ 38 5 6 Twisted Pair Cable Specifications 5 41 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND
128. 5 9 although only the first half link parameter is assigned for L3 station it can read devices that are assigned to the second half link parameters used by other station 5 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A System configuration T T TST T T T TET TST T T T T a T T T TET TST 200 E B300 E 8800 900 pe BADO MELSECNET II mode compatible data link module is used for M L1 L2 and L3 stations B WO 100 200 300 400 800 900 A00 FFF First half link parameter Second half link setting range parameter setting range Fig 5 9 System using MELSECNET II mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 2 MELSECNET II composite mode In the MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET mode compatible local stations and remote stations can be connected to the master station MELSECNET II mode compatible data link module By selecting the MELSECNET II composite mode data link modules used in the MELSECNET mode previous MELSECNET data link system and those compatible with the MELSECNET II mode can be used within the same data link a Asforlink relays B and link registers W data link is possible up to 4096 points in the range of B WO to FFF b The maximum number of link points per master station or MELSECNET I mode compatible local station is 2048 bytes The MELSECNET II mode has the first half link parameter and the second half link parameter Since up to 1024 b
129. 500 2 At the receiving station WO and W500 data are transferd to D10 and D110 respectively when BO and B500 turn ON Read write of the special function module installed to the remote station a Execute the RFRP or RTOP instruction after initial communications of remote stations The completion of initial communications can be checked with special link registers D9224 to D9227 Refer to the ladder examples in Section 9 8 If the RFRP or RTOP instruction is executed before the completion of initial communications an OPERATION ERROR occurs 9 2 9 PROGRAMMING mnnn rn r r rrr r rr F b If a receive error occurs while the RFRP or RTOP instruction is being executed the handshake signals YnE YnF may remain ON Therefore create a ladder so that the handshake signals YnE YnF and the special function module error signal X n 1 D are turned OFF in case of a communication error Refer to the ladder examples in Section 9 8 Link data in cut off stations If a local station and or remote station is cut off during data link due to power on or reset operation the data immediately before the cut off are retained in other stations Instructions that cannot be used in data link programs Pulse instructions PLS SFTP etc cannot be used for outputting data to a remote I O station or communications between the master station and local statio
130. 8F 280 2FF 200 27F 000 0BF 380 39F MASTER L LOCAL REMOTE t L LOCAL REMOTE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS Applicability MELSEC A 7 8 Link Parameters in the MELSECNET Mode The following describes link parameter setting when the MELSECNET II mode is used When setting the link parameters consider the following points for assignment 1 Determine whether to assign both the first and second half link parameters a If both the first and second half link parameters are assigned up to 2048 bytes can be used for each station If the link range is less than 1024 bytes per station setting of only the first half link parameters is required b Using only the first half link parameters makes handshakes easy Handshake processing is required when both first and second half link parameters are set For handshake processing refer to Section 9 1 4 c The setting range of the first half link parameters is BO to FFF and WO to FFF d The range that available for the second half link parameters is the range assigned to the first half link parameters final device number 1 If O point is set for the first half link parameters assignment of the second half link parameters can be started with B WO Link relay link register B
131. 9F c Assignment of local stations In this example inputs X and outputs Y are not required because there is empty area in the link relay B assignment However to simplify the explanation 128 input X points and 128 output Y points are assigned 1 Assignment of local station No 2 Local station No 2 uses the X YO to X Y17F range as 1 of host station For the data link the 180 to X Y7FF range can be used 2 Assignment of local station No 3 Local station No 3 uses the X YO to X Y14F range as I O of host station For the data link the X Y 150 to X Y7FF range can be used Master Remote I O station Local station Local station Remote I O station station points O points points used by the used by the used by the host station host station host station The range the shaded area be used as internal memory M Fig 7 19 Input X and output Y assignment example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 4 Link parameter setting example When the assignment of 1 to 3 is executed set the link parameters as shown in the figure below LINK 000 27F 000 2BF 300 341 360 39F 680 77F 230 59F 600 77F 200 4BF SLAVE PC STATIONS lt lt 2220 Drmr mmrer lt lt gt 0 MASTER 100 17F 200 27F 100 17F 200 2BF 320 341 230 30F 680 6FF 700 77F 480 59F 030 10F 200 27F 200 27F 080 19F 200 28F 600 67F 700 77F 400 4BF 000 0
132. A SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME mr r 64 Time to Access Another Station from a Peripheral Device This section describes the processing time when accessing to other station from a peripheral device For the processing time of LRDP LWTP and RFRP RTOP refer to Section 6 2 3 When a MELSECNET B data link system is used the transmission processing time varies depending on the set communication speed and the total number of stations To transfer a sequence program 6K steps to other station from a peripheral device using a MELSECNET B data link system the processing time requires 4 minutes 7 seconds to write to other station 1 2 minutes and 1 seconds to read from other station 2 1 minutes 56 seconds to verify with other station 2 The above data can be applied when the communication speed is set to 1MBPS and the total number of stations is 32 If either a larger sequence program is sent or the communication speed is set slower the processing time will become longer than above mentioned values If the total number of stations is less than 32 the processing time becomes shorter than the above REMARK as When the CPU module to which a sequence program is written is set to STOP 2 2 s When the CPU module is set to RUN MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNETII MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode co
133. AJ71AP21 S3 Use the station number setting switch to set the selection of master or CPU local station module link module E oh 2 O 79 c A1SJ71AP21 Q2ASHCPU 21 Q2ASHCPU ii 2 2 51 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU QO2CPU A 2 QO6HCPU A Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU AJ71AP21 R21 AJ71AP21 S3 A1SJ71AP21 R21 Used only for local stations Installed in an I O slot in an extension base unit A1SJ71AP23 Q R23Q 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM 5 Table 4 1 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available Module Model MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Remarks MELSECNET MELSECNET composite II composite 21 21 53 3 A1NCPUR21 2 21 A2NCPUP21 S A2NCPUR21 hesta A2NCPUR21 52 sa ion number A2NCPUP21 R21 setting switch to set the S1 AJ71AP21 S3 tons master or local station CPU A2NCPUP21 module 54 with link A2NCPUR21 function s4 link ASNCPUP21 module A3NCPUP21 S3 A3NCPUR21 A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPUP21 AJ71AP21 S1 R21 AJ71AP21 S3 A2ACPUR21 A J72AP21 id R21 A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 AJ72P25 S3 54 MELSECNET and MELSECNET composite modes can be used for the second tier 2 MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET composite modes can be u
134. Available with RTOP 4 Instruction weer Assign the input X and output Y range used for data link to the I O number used by the master station as I O of host station a Divide the area used for data link into an M R area for communication between the master station and a remote I O station and an M L area for communication between the master station and a local station to assign b M L area is used when the number of link relay B points is insufficient Therefore it is not necessary to assign the M L area when there is sufficient number of link relay B points Make sure that the number of link points per station is as follows Refer to Section 7 6 1 Master station first half link parameters 1024 bytes or less Master station second half link parameters 1024 bytes or less Local station first half link parameters 1024 bytes or less Local station second half link parameters 1024 bytes or less e Remote I O stations 512 bytes or less Inputs and outputs are 512 points of X YO to 1FF 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es 1 If the M R area used by the system is used incorrectly in a user program data cannot be read written correctly when the RFRP RTOP instruction is executed 2 The number of link points can be reduced by mounting modules to a remote I O station in groups of input modules special function modules and out
135. CNET composite mode In the MELSECNET mode the data link system operates within the range of B WO to 3FF regardless of the link module used for the master station In the MELSECNET II mode the following link modules are used as the master and local stations and B W400 and later are used for data link e AnACPUP21 R21 e AnACPU AJ71AP21 R21 T21B AnUCPU AJ71AP21 R21 T21B e QnACPU AJ71AP21 R21 T21B e A2ZASCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 T21B e AZUSHCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 T21B e Q2AS H CPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 T21B e QCPU A A1SJ71AP21 R21 T21B e QCPU A1SJ71AP23Q R23Q T23BQ Local station only The following describes the major differences between the MELSECNET mode and the MELSECNET mode he data link device range has been increased from B WO to 3FF 1024 points to B WO to FFF 4096 points in the MELSECNET II mode maximum number of link points per station master station and local station has been increased from 1024 bytes to 2048 bytes in the MELSECNET II mode Connection of remote stations is impossible in the MELSECNET II mode The MELSECNET II composite mode has the almost same function as that of the MELSECNET II mode and it is a mode which can connect to link module and remote I O station of the MELSECNET mode The following describes the major differences among the three modes 1 Link modules that can be used as the master station Refer to Table 1 2 for the link module model name a MELSECNET m
136. CNET II mode e MELSECNET II compatible station 1 MELSECNET compatible station 0 DEVICE NUMBER ess ore mio Teva sa sooo oo vr be es ns ee or vo D92o2 tse tis Lia trs cro rn ero to fez jte 15 14 12 er sas Lor Loo ze vos cao os 121 f r20 vie en 09241 148 L47 tae Las taa taa Laz Lat tao Lao tse 137 136 tas 34 Las If a local station goes down data before the failure will be held When contents of D9224 to D9227 and D9228 to D9231 are ORed and the relevant bit is 1 the corresponding bit in the above special registers is enabled Even If the host station master station goes down the data before the failure will be also held 9 MELSEC A Table 9 5 List of MELSECNET special link registers Continued Device Name Data Description Number Stores the current path of the data link 1 Forward loop 2 Reverse loop Forward loop Forward reverse loop Data link in forward loop Data link in reverse loop Loopback in forward reverse direction D9204 Link status Loopback in forward direction Loopback in reverse Forward loopback direction Data link impossible Forward loopback Reverse loopback Forward loopback Reverse loopback Reverse loopback When 5 is stored the monitoring time setting may be too small The data in D9204 is updated e
137. CT 1ST 2ND RANGE OF B W REMOTE t L LOCAL REMOTE MELSECNET II LOCAL ra 7 11 7 11 1 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET I MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode DATA L N K S 5 5 Applicability MELSEC A Assignment of Inputs and Outputs to the Master Station in a Remote System When a remote system is configured with the MELSECNET data link system there restrictions on the assignment for the master station The following describes the assignment of master station which consists of a remote I O station In case of the master station local station which links to local stations only I O assignment can be executed in the same manner as for an independent system REMARK addresses are automatically assigned by the programmable controller CPU A peripheral device is not particularly required for I O assignment However I O assignment with a peripheral device enables followings e Saving I O points 16 points occupied by an empty slot e Reserving number of I O points 32 48 or 64 points at an empty area for the system expansion in the future I O assignment restrictions 1 assignment must be made from the head address X YO to the final address assigned to the remote station Failure to complete assignment up to
138. D9240 9 23 9 9 9 2 Device Number D9243 D9244 09251 09252 09253 09254 09255 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode Eo j Applicability OD 9 MELSEC A opecial link registers effective only for local stations Table 9 7 and Table 9 8 show the special registers controlled only when the host station is set to the master station Name Station number data of the station itself Slave station number data Receive error detection count Local station operating status Local station error status Data Stores a station number 0 to 64 Stores a slave station number Stores the accumulated total number of receive error occurrences Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to No 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to No 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 Table 9 7 List of MELSECNET special link registers Description Stores the station number assigned to the host station Used by a local station to check the host station number Used by a local station to check the total number of slave stati
139. E0 111411444 020 lt lt 5 50 100 186 250 294 340 3 1 700 7FF 390 47F 260 36F 580 6AF 030 12F 250 33F 1B0 2BF 080 1AF 6D0 76F 1A0 25F 2A0 3BF 500 5BF 000 09F 210 2CF 300 41F 000 t M MASTER LOCAL REMOTE L LOCAL R REMOTE Fig 9 8 Link device assignment 9 37 9 PROGRAMMING mms 1 Read program LRDP instruction The following describes program where the present value of C50 to C55 of local station No 2 is read to D100 to D105 of the master station For system configuration and link parameter setting refer to Fig 9 7 and Fig 9 8 Program example Executed only when the read command is turned ON PROGRAMMING M9236 PROCEDURE PLS Mo M Read command Turns 1 ON when the read com MO mand is changed from OFF to ON SET Determine whether pe an LRDP instruction yr Flags controlled by the can be executed LWTP instruction M1 M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 Turns M2 execution command ON SET M2 when an LRDP instruction can be executed Turns M1 OFF Execute the LRDP M2 Reads the current values in C50 D100 Ks to C54 of local station No 2 into D100 to D104 of the master station 9201 fast wa awd Resets and initializes M2 M9200 HST M9200 and M9201 when an LRDP instruction has been executed Reset and initialize the LRD
140. ECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 9 PROGRAMMING wawa co 5 5 MELSEC A 9 8 Read Write Program from a Remote Station to a Special Function Module This section describes the programming method to read write data of a special function module installed to a remote station from the master station System configuration For MELSECNET data link system Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote I O station XAO No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 utu Y70 21 X1F XBF XF Y7F X1F X9F 2 X4F Y4F Y7FY9F YBO Y130 YAO Y 120 YBF Y13F YAF Y12F Y12F Y140 190 Y1A0 1 Y19F Y17F Y20F Y14F Y198F Y13F Y1AF Input module Output module S Special function module For MELSECNET B data link system Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote I O station 1 2 No 3 No 4 i x20 k J Y30 X80 RON 80 XAO 70 Y80 A B AJ72 E AJ72 XAF T25B i PIE T25B 21 21 B B SSE X8F Y7F X1F X9F X2F Y4F v7F Y9F YBO Y 130 150 X110 Y13F YAF Y12F Y16F 12 Y140 190 200 Y130 190 Y15F Y19F Y17F Y20F Yi4F 19 Y13F Y1AF Inpu
141. ELSECNET Remas composite II composite v rm e Um 7 r ATNCPUP21 auctio 53 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUR21 1 A2NCPUP21 S1 O A2NCPUP21 S4 CPU A2NCPUR21 S1 module with link A3NCPUP21 function A3NCPUP21 S3 71 21 A3NCPUR 1 link A2ACPUP21 module A2ACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPUP21 S1 2 2 2 A2ACPUP21 S4 O O O Use the station A3ACPUP21 number setting switch A3ACPUP21 S3 to set the selection of ASACPUR 1 masier or local station A2ASCPU A1SJ71AP21 A2ASCPU A1SJ71AR21 A2ACPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 cpu A2ACPU S1 A1SJ71AR21 module with link AZUSHCPU S1 function A19J71AP21 15 71 21 9 2 3 2 3 A2USHCPU S1 O O O link A1SJ71AR21 pen Q2ASCPU A4SJ71AP21 Q2ASCPU A1SJ71AR21 Q2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 Q2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AR21 54 MELSECNET and MELSECNET II composite modes can be used for the second tier 2 MELSECNET MELSECNET and MELSECNET composite modes can be used for the second tier 3 Applicable when the A1SJ71AT21B is used 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM Table 4 3 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available Applicable system system data link MELSECNET data link Module Model MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Remarks CPU module with link function link modules two A1 Q2ASHCPU A1SJ71AR21 Q2ASHCPU
142. EM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM SE A 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM This section describes the MELSECNET B data link system 3 1 Outline of the MELSECNET B Data Link System 3 1 1 Configuration of the data link system The MELSECNET B data link system is a system to connect link modules using shielded twisted pair cable Up to 31 slave stations local station and remote station can be used in a system which has one link module as the master station Shielded twisted pair cable Master station Local station 1 Master station Master station is the link module that controls the whole MELSECNET B data link system The number of connected slave stations Max 31 and the device B W X Y ranges for data communications are set with link parameters at the programmable controller CPU in the master station The master station controls data communications in a MELSECNET B data link system in accordance with these set link parameters 2 Slave stations Slave stations include a local station and a remote station a Local station When two or more programmable controller CPUs are used for data link local stations are used to increase the number of I O points and the program capacity in a large scale system b Remote station Remote stations are used to reduce wiring cost when data must be frequently input output from to devices that are far away from the programmab
143. END instruction are set by the sequence program as a link refresh inhibited zone The link refresh inhibited zone can be set by EI DI instruction For details of EI DI instruction refer to the Type ACPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 The link refresh timing of the following modules is the same as that of the CPU module e ATSJ71AT21B e AJ71AT21B A1SJ71AP21 R21 AJ71AP21 R21 AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71P22 R22 e AJ71AP22 R22 A link scan does not influence the processing time for example scan time for the ACPU of a master station or local station since link scan is executed in parallel with master and local station processing 4 The processing time scan time of the master and local stations is increased by the link refresh time The following chart shows an example of executing link refresh processing after END processing Link refresh time Sequence program execution time 0 Sequence execution Scan time 5 Link data communication is possible in any of the following ACPU states RUN STOP PAUSE STEP RUN MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING v menu cape e e AND PROCESSING TIME musa 5 5 5 T e ej MELSEC A 6 1 3 Link data during a communication error The following describes how the link data used for data link is processed when a communication error occurs The same applies to a communication error of the station
144. ET MELSEC MELSECNET maoue Mone MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite II composite mode mode mode mode jUm z rum efr A2UCPU AJ71AP21 A2UCPU AJ71AR21 A2UCPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 A2UCPU S1 AJ71AR21 A3UCPU AJ71AP21 S3 A3UCPU AJ71AR21 A4UCPU AJ71AP21 53 CPU 22 module A4UCPU Use the station number AJ71AR21 1 4 4 AJ71AT21B Seng Switch to set the link 2 selection of master or modules AJ74AP24 local station two 053 Q2ACPU AJ71AR21 Q2ACPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 Q2ACPU S1 AJ71AR21 Q3ACPU AJ71AP21 S3 Q3ACPU AJ71AR21 Q4ACPU AJ71AP21 S3 Q4ACPU AJ71AR21 54 MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite modes be used for the second tier 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM mms 4 3 Data Link System when the Second Tier is MELSECNET B and the Third Tier is MELSECNET In the system that the second tier is a MELSECNET B data link system and the third tier is a MELSECNET data link system the second tier is connected with shielded twisted pair cables and the third tier is connected with optical fiber cables or coaxial cables a Up to 31 local and remote I O stations can be connected to a master station for the second tier b For the third tier up to 64 local and remote stations can be connected to the master station which is the local station for the s
145. F Link Link inputs outputs x Y gt lt m indicates the master station TURNS sable for the third tier range for The range in the shaded area secondithird can be used as internal memory M tiers Usable link range Link Link inputs outputs X Y Fig 7 47 Inputs outputs assignment example Remote 1 0 station No 4 Link Link inputs outputs x Y Higher link local station No 3 Lower link master station 21 AJ71AP21 Number of I O points used by the hast staion Link inputs outputs X Y 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 6 Link parameter setting The following shows the link parameters assigned as 1 to 4 a First half link parameters for the second tier 000 2FF 060 35F 500 77F 500 77F 360 3A4 3E3 250 47F 4E0 7CF 1A0 36F 4B0 70F MELSECNET MULTI MODE LINK SLAVE FIRST M ALL L MASTER PC MITTENT Mon Fo nm TEILT IST INTER lt lt 5 x lt lt xSSS0E0 2 lt x 100 17F 180 2FF 160 1DF 1E0 35F 4E0 5DF 390 47F 250 36F 6D0 7CF 030 12F 250 33F 1A0 2BF 080 17F 4B0 54F 1A0 25F eAO 36F 650 70F 000 09F 210 2CF 1F0 2BF 000 MASTER L LOCAL PRESS lt SSN gt TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RANGE OF B W REMOTE REMOTE MELSECNET II LOCAL 000 2FF 060 35 500 77F 500 77
146. LSECNET II mode with only the first half link parameters set The settings of the second half link parameters are only effective when more than 1024 bytes of link data are to be used per a station master station or local station 1 First half link parameters a Total slave stations The number of local stations to be connected Remote stations cannot be connected b Monitoring time The time used by the system to determine whether communication between the master station and all slave stations local stations is being executed normally c Master station assignment Assign the device range B WO to FFF to be used by the master station for writing data from the master station to the link relays B and link registers W d Local station assignment 1 Assign the device range B WO to B WFFF to be used by a local station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W 2 Assign the link range using the outputs Y of the master station and inputs X of a local station and the inputs X of the master station and outputs Y of a local station 2 Second half link parameters a Master station assignment Assign the device range to be used by the master station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W b Local station assignment Assign the device range to be used by the local station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W REMARK The device range that can be a
147. Link parameter setting range B WO 100 200 300 380 3FF DELI Second tier link parameter setting 10 180 1CO 200 280 2 0300 e efe m P Link parameter setting for the master Link parameter setting for the station L1 m for third tier 1 master station L2 m for third tier 2 Read write permitted range R Reading range W Writing range Internal relays and data registers D area Master station M for the second tier 1 The M station writes data to the devices in the B WO to FF range and sends it to the other stations When BO is turned ON in the M station for example BO in other stations are also turned ON 2 The M station can receive data written to the devices in the B W100 to 37F range by other stations 3 Devices in the B W380 to 3FF range can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B W0 100 180 1 0 200 280 2CO 300 380 M 22 21 W a m Range where data can be received range where data be sent Range where M can receive data Range where M can send data 5 SPECIFICATIONS msrnY rr rr r n r rm Local station No 1 Master station L1 m for third tier 1 1 The L1 m station writes data to the devices the B W100 to 17F range sends it to the other stations When B100 is turned ON in the L1 m station for example B100 in other stations are also turned ON Except for 2 1 2 2 stations
148. MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II 9 mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING poop ses MELSEC A 10 3 4 Flowchart for when the data communication error occurs EHROR OCCURRENCE Is the entire data link YES system disabled NO s data link at a specific station disabled YES Refer to Section 10 3 3 NO Refer to Section 10 3 2 o Is data link for inputs X and outputs Y disabled NO Is data link for link relays B and link registers W disabled NO 10 19 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A Data link is disabled for inputs X and outputs Y NO remote station YES local station Set the master station and local stations to the STOP status Is the station in question a local station Is data link for the master station link inputs X disabled NO link output Y YES link input Forcibly turn the local station link outputs ON OFF Forcibly turn the master station link outputs ON OFF Monitor the local station s link inputs X that correspond to the master station s link outputs Y Monitor the master station s link inputs X that correspond to the local station s link outputs Y Are the master station link inputs 9
149. MELSECNETII MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION MELSEC A 8 7 3 Forward loop test and reverse loop test The forward reverse loop tests require data link parameter Write data link parameter setting of only the total number of slave stations to the master station 1 Forward loop test a The forward loop test checks the forward loop in MELSECNET data link system after optical fiber cables or coaxial cables are laid down b When the receive end of the forward loop in the master station cannot receive data sent from the send end of the forward loop in the master station the loop is determined to be faulty For optical fiber cables Master station Forward loop data flow For coaxial cables Master station R SD F RD F SD R RD Reverse loop Forward loop data flow Fig 8 15 Forward loop test 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION es 2 Reverse loop test a The reverse loop test checks the reverse loop in MELSECNET data link system after optical fiber cables or coaxial cables are laid down b When the receive end of the reverse loop in the master station cannot receive data sent from the send end of the reverse loop in the master station the loop is determined to be faulty For optical fiber cables Master station For coaxial cables Master station R SD F RD F SD R RD Heverse loop data flo
150. NET B data link system 1 The following link modules are installed to a base unit a Link module compatible with MELSECNET mode Installed in the CPU slot A1SJ72T25B for remote station AJ72T25B for remote station b Link module compatible with MELSECNET II mode Installed an slot A1SJ71AT21B for master station local station AJ71AT21B for master station local station Although the following link modules can be connected to the MELSECNET data link system they are not discussed in this manual Graphic operation terminal A6BSW S3 54 55 bypass switch Personal computer board Refer to the manual for these link modules for details 1 14 1 OVERVIEW mmn r m 1 32 General names of CPU modules This manual describes CPU modules using the following generic names 1 AnNCPU AnNCPU is general name for the following link modules 1 AANCPU 3 A2NCPU S1 2 A2NCPU 4 2 AnACPU AnACPU is general name for the following link modules 1 A2ACPU 3 ASACPU 2 A2ACPU S1 3 AnUCPU AnUCPU is general name for the following link modules 1 A2UCPU 3 2 AZUCPU S1 4 AAUCPU 4 QnACPU QnACPU is general name for the following link modules 1 Q2ACPU 3 2 2 51 4 Q4ACPU 5 ACPU is general name for all the CPUs listed in items 1 to 4 AOJ2HCPU and A2CCPU 6 AnSCPU AnSCPU is general name for the following link modules 1 AT
151. No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to No 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 Description Stores station Nos of local stations or remote stations which are exchanging initial setting data for data link processing into the corresponding bits in D9224 to D9227 as shown below DEVICE NUMBER 15 514 121 11 bo be b7 be 58 b4 mium un unun ur us n 16 15 14 13 12113 10 UR UR IUR JUR un IUR UR UR LR 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 un um um um UR un jun u 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40139 38 37 38 35 34 WRI UR UR jur un jun UR jum um UR un um 64 63 52 61 60159 58 57 56 55 154 53 152 51 50 49 e When local station or a remote I O station is communicating initial setting data link parameters the bit corresponding to the station number is set to 1 Example When No 23 and No 45 are communicating initial setting data link parameters 1 is set to bit 6 of D9225 and bit 12 of D9226 When D9225 is monitored its value is 64 40 when 09226 is monitored its value is 4096 1000 When the communication of initial setting data is complete the bit is automatically reset to 0 he master station
152. OM SUB MASTER PC Mc Displays the line state of self station loop LL mme Close 1 Screen switches Displays the state of a local station 10 6 10 TROUBLESHOOTING es 1 Displaying operation mode of the host station a Displays the operation status of host station 1 ON LINE Host station mode setting is ON LINE automatic return function set not set 2 OFF LINE Host station mode setting is OFF LINE SELF LOOPBACK TEST or STATION TO STATION TEST 3 LOOP TEST Host station mode setting is FORWARD LOOP TEST or REVERSE LOOP TEST b The operation display is the same as contents in M9240 and M9252 2 Displaying communication status of the host station a Displays the communication status of the host station 1 P MTR WAITING Awaiting parameter data to be sent from the master station Axe Normal communication is being executed Oy COP The host station is disconnected and communication has been stopped b The communication status is the same as contents in M9250 and M9251 3 Displaying loop line status of the host station a Displays the forward loop line F loop and reverse loop line R loop status of the host station Only is displayed when a MELSECNET B data link system is used 1 OK Loop line is normal 2 NG Loop line is faulty b The loop line status is the same as contents in M9241 and M9242
153. OOP OK ERROR NO 0 Displays the line status of the R LOOP OK error numbers host remote I O station IBM PC AT Displavs the LOOP MONITORING operation mode lt STATUS gt x STATION NO L1 Displays the of the host remote MODE ON LINE LOOP BACK loopback ex station OFF LINE OK ecution state LOOP TEST NG Displays the com COMM STATUS lt LOCATION Displays the munication status of P MTR WAITING YES assignment the host remote M NO status station Denn Displays the loop OK 0 line status of the OK error num host remote bers station Fig 10 3 Loop monitor screen 1 Displaying operation mode of the host station a Displays the operation status of the host station 1 ON LINE Mode setting of host station is ON LINE with without automatic return function 2 OFF LINE Mode setting of host station is OFF LINE SELF LOOPBACK TEST or STATION TO STATION TEST 3 LOOP TEST Mode setting of host station is FORWARD LOOP TEST or REVERSE LOOP TEST 2 Displaying communication status of the host station a Displays the communication status of the host station 1 P MTR WAITING Awaiting parameter data to be sent from the master station Normal communication is being executed 9 STOP atriis The host station is disconnected and communication has been stopped 10 9 10 TROUBLESHOOTING n
154. P instruction hereinafter referred to as the M R 1 Further divide M R area into a read area write area and assign them a The area used to read data from a remote I O station to the master station hereinafter referred to as the M R area b The area used to write data from the master station to a remote I O station hereinafter referred to as the M R area Setting allowed Setting not allowed Fig 7 6 Link register W assignment range 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 2 system uses the R area to execute RFRP RTOP instructions Consider the range used by the system when assigning the M R area Number of points used by the system The link register W 1 point is used for one special function module installed to a remote I O station Range used by the system The range used by the system begins at the M R area head device number assigned to each remote station to number of use points 1 Example When three special function modules are installed to remote station No 2 with link parameters set as shown below W360 to 362 in the M R area W360 to 3AF are used by the system Setting of link parameters WO 200 260 280 300 360 3B0 M R area M R area M R area Assignment of remote station No 2 Link registers WOO0 be used with RTOP instruction 2 The device range that can be assig
155. P instruction flag COMPLETE Executed while the read command is ON PROGRAMMING Flags controlled by the LRDP instruction PROCEDURE Read command a Flags controlled the LWTP instruction Determine whether M11M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 M9236 Reads the current values in C50 to an LRDP instruction C54 of local station No 2 into D100 to can be executed D104 of the master station Execute the LRDP instruction Reset and initialize the LRDP instruction flag Turns ON M10 execution command when the LRDP instruction is executable Resets and initializes M10 M9200 and M9201 when an LRDP instruction has been executed Generates a pulse to execute the instruction again M10 is turned ON when M11 is turned OFF Turns the re execu tion command of the LRDP instruction ON COMPLETE 9 es 2 Write program LWTP instruction The following describes the program where the present value of CO to C9 of the master station is written to CO to C9 of the local station No 3 For system configuration and link parameter setting refer to Fig 9 7 and Fig 9 8 Program example For execution only when the write command status is changed from OFF to ON PROGRAMMING M9236 PROCEDURE PLS m20 lt write command Turns M21 ON when the write com M20 mand is changed from OFF to ON F Flags controlled by the Determine whether LRDP instruction an LWTP instruction
156. PECIFICATIONS es 5 6 Twisted Pair Cable Specifications This section explains the twisted pair cable for the MELSECNET B data link system Table 5 6 Shielded twisted pair cable Dielectric withstand voltage V min Characteristic impedance 100kHz 110 100 Cross section 5 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A MEMO MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING v menu cape AND PROCESSING TIME muy 5 5 5 TL e 5 MEL SEC A 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME This chapter describes how link data are sent or received in the data link system and it s processing time 6 1 Link Data Communication Processing 6 1 1 Communication processing outline In the data link system the link data set at the link parameters of the master station is communicated repeatedly 1 Link module configuration a A link module used in a master station or local station has the link data storage area which communicates the link data to other stations and the data memory storage area used for processing of the host station b Alink module used in a remote station has the link data storage area which stores the link data to be communicated to the master station 2 Link data communication Link data communication includes a link scan and a link refresh a Alink scan is communications of link data between link modules between link data storage areas b A l
157. RFRP RTOP instructions of the data link instructions can also be used For details on the instructions refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 Not accessible when using GX Developer Improved RAS Reliability Availability Serviceability functions a Automatic return function When a slave station local station where an error occurred returns to the link enabled state the station automatically restarts the data link operation Refer to section 5 3 3 b Error detection 1 The data link operating state is stored in special relays M and special registers D in a programmable controller CPU The data link operating state can be checked by reading the data stored in the special relays M and special registers D 2 The data link operating state can also be checked by using the link monitor function at a peripheral device AGGPP or AGHGP c Self diagnostics function The self diagnostics function of the data link module checks the link module hardware and shielded twisted pair cable connections Three operating modes can be selected by setting the CPU module To satisfy various system configuration requirements different operating modes can be selected for the MELSECNET B data link system by setting link parameters The MELSECNET B data link system has the following three operation modes MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode and MELSECNET II composite mode Section 1 2 gives detail
158. ROCEDURE Check whether communication with M9037 Wano wi vo remote station No 1 is normal Error processing Reset the handshake signal for the RFRP and RTOP instructions wo NO M100 m3 Reset the error signal of the special function module M3 X71D Sequence program for remote I O station No 1 P Start signal M3 Y7OF 71 X71F PLs 2 ser wi 1 Read with an RFRP wsoo instruction swov woo 200 k10 X71E fast wr 710 COMPLETE No Detects an error in remote I O station No 1 when of 09228 is 1 Detects parameter transfer of remote I O station No 1 Parameters are being sent when bO of D9224 is 1 Turns M10 ON when an error is found in remote I O station No 1 or parameters are being communicated Resets handshake signals Y7OE YnE and Y 0F YnF if a communication error occurs during the execution of an RFRP instruction or an RTOP instruction by remote station No 1 Turns M1 ON if the start signal is turned ON while an RF RP instruction or an instruction is not being executed Stores 10 word data in addresses 0 to 9 of the special function module loaded to X Y30 to X Y AF of the remote I O station W300 to W309 of the master station Stores the data in W300 to W309 to D200 to
159. ROCEDURES TO OPERATION rr 8 7 2 Station to station test 1 Station to station test The station to station test checks the cable connections of two adjacent stations When the data sent from the master station link module is not returned from the slave station link module in a given time the loop is determined to be faulty 1 For MELSECNET data link system Link module for optical fiber cable Master station link module station n Slave station link module station n 1 Forward loop data flow Loo Optical fiber cable 2 cores Reverse loop data flow Link module for coaxial cable Master station link module station n Slave station link module station n 1 Reverse loop data flow icu Forward loop Coaxial cable data flow 2 For MELSECNET B data link system Slave station link module Master station link module station n station n 1 SOB RDB 24 l Shielded twisted pair cable Shield Data flow Master station SDA SDB Slave station RDA RDB t i Master station RDA HDB lt Slave station SDA SDB Fig 8 14 Station to station test 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION 2 Test procedure The following flowchart shows the operation procedure for station to station test START Connect the link cables as shown in Fig 8 14 Set the link modules to the STOP state When testing remote I O stations
160. Range where 071 send data Local station No 2 7 2 in third tier 2 1 The 7 2station writes data to the devices in the range of B W2CO to 2FF and sends it to other stations When 2 0 is turned ON in the 7 2 station for example B2CO in other stations are also turned ON Except for 21 and 2 stations 2 The 27 station can receive data written to the devices in the range of B WO to FF and B W200 to 2BF by other station 3 Devices in the range of B W100 to 1FF and B W300 to 3FF can be used instead of internal relays M and data registers D B WO 100 180 1CO 200 280 2CO 300 380 Lim 21 42 Lom 11 22 13 gt Range where 2 can receive data Range where 2 can send data REMARK 1 Qindicates the range where data can be received 5 15 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS SE ee ep ss MELSEC A 5 3 2 Transient transmission function The transient transmission is a function to Read write from to devices T C D and W in a local station from the master station Read write the buffer memory of a special function module in a remote station from the master station Enable communications from a peripheral device connected to the programmable controller CPU to the other programmable controllers
161. SJHCPU 3 A2SHCPU 2 ATSHCPU 7 AnASCPU AnASCPU is general name for the following link modules 1 A2ASCPU 3 AZUSHCPU S1 2 A2ASCPU S1 8 QnASCPU QnASCPU is general name for the following link modules 1 Q2ASCPU 3 Q2ASHCPU 2 Q2ASCPU S1 4 Q2ASHCPU S1 9 AnNCPUP21 R21 AnNCPUP21 R21 is general name for the following link modules 1 AINCPUP21 R21 5 21 53 2 AINCPUP21 S3 6 2 21 54 3 A2NCPUP21 R21 7 ASNCPUP21 R21 4 A2NCPUP21 R21 S1 8 ASNCPUP21 S3 1 15 1 OVERVIEW es 10 AnACPUP21 R21 AnACPUP21 R21 is general name for the following link modules 1 A2ACPUP21 R21 4 21 54 2 A2ACPUP21 R21 S1 5 ASACPUP21 R21 3 A2ACPUP21 S3 6 A3ACPUP21 S3 11 QCPU A QCPU A is general name for the following CPU modules 1 QO2CPU A 3 QOGHCPU A 2 QO2HCPU A 12 QCPU QCPU is general name for the following CPU modules 1 2 4 Q12HCPU 2 QO2HCPU 5 Q25HCPU 3 QO6HCPU 1 16 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM SE A 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM This section describes the MELSECNET data link system 2 1 Outline of the MELSECNET Data Link System 2 1 1 Configuration of the data link system The MELSECNET data link system connects link modules via optical fiber or coaxial cables In the MELSECNET data link system up to 64 slave local and remote stations can be connected to a link module used as t
162. T and the 3rd tier is MELSECNET B and the 3rd tier is MELSECNET MELSECNET B Second tier MELSECNET B MELSECNET B data link system Second tier Second tier data link system MELSECNET MELSECNET data link system data link system MELSECNET B Third tier data link system MELSECNET data link system Third tier MELSECNET B qata link system Third tier MELSECNET data link system M Master station for the second tier L1 L2 Second tier local stations R3 Second tier remote I O station m Master station for the third tier and I2 Third tier local stations r3 Third tier remote 1 0 station Refer to Section 4 1 Refer to Section 4 2 Refer to Section 4 3 Refer to Section 4 4 Fig 4 1 Three tier systems 1 When the AnUCPU QnACPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A is used the three tier system can be configured with the MELSECNET B data link system When other CPU modules are used the three tier system cannot be configured only with the MELSECNET B data link system 2 Local and remote stations in the third tier are referred to sub slave stations and are controlled by the master station in the third tier 4 COMPOSITION OF THREE TIER SYSTEM 5 0 41 Three Tier System Using the MELSECNET Data Link System When the second and third tiers are configured with MELSECNET data link system connect the stations using optical fiber cables or coaxial cables
163. THER MEDULES LX LY lt gt X Y TRN NETWORK NO SIZE O800 HPT SIZE 0800 HPT SIZE 0800 HPT pde oS 222 E XU EACUS SS e eet 7 10 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET I MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET I composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS ix qe MELSEC A 7 4 Link Parameters 7 4 1 Link parameters to be set for the MELSECNET mode When the MELSECNET mode is used only one type of link parameter is used On the link parameter setting screen set the data for the following items 1 Total link slave stations The total number of slave stations local stations remote stations to be connected N Monitoring time Refer to Section 7 5 The monitoring time is used by the system to determine whether communication between the master station and all slave stations local stations and remote stations is being executed normally 3 Master station assignment Assign the device range B WO to 3FF to be used by the master station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W 4 Slave station type Set the type of slave station local station or remote station to be connected per station number 5 Local station assignment Assign the device range B WO to 3FF to be used by a local station for writing data to the link relays B and link registers W b Assign the link range using the outputs Y
164. U NAGOYA JAP When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
165. U local station A3UCPU AJ71AT21B A4UCPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU 2 QO2HCPU A A1SJ71AT21B QO6HCPU A QO2CPU Used only for local stations oo QO6HCPU Installed in an I O Q12HCPU slot in an extension base unit Q25HCPU AOJ2P250 os NN S3 AO0J2R25 Link UT2P25 module AJ72R25 A1SJ72T25B AJ72T25B CPU module link module gt gt N N gt O O 79 79 c 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 2 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available 2 Applicable system system MELSECNET data link MELSECNET B data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Maggie Model MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite composite mode mode mode mode Um z jum z 21 mirum A1NCPUR21 A2NCPUP21 22 2 21 AJ71AT21B wT t US 21 oo A3NCPUR21 A2ACPUP21 Use the station number setting switch to set the A2ACPUR21 selection of master or local station AJ71AT21B 2 A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A2ASCPU A1SJ71AP2 1 A2ASCPU CPU tA1SJ71AR2 module 1 A2ASCPU 1 15 71 21 E 2 3 2 3 link 1 modules A1SJ71AP2 two 1 A2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AR2 1 54 MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite modes be used for the second tier 2 MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET II composite mod
166. UALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS
167. WO B10 and B11 are used for handshaking of the master station and local station No 2 M9038 Nat SET Turns the initialization flag M1 of WO the start of CPU module run and 10 WO Lx ee wooo Initializes WO data to Turns B10 ON when the initialization of the WO data has been completed The value of WO is increased by 1 every ser 6 seconds wooo Turn B11 ON when instruction has been executed addition of 1 to WO data w Turns M1 and M2 OFF when the WO data has been read by local station No 2 2 B70 turned ON Local station No 2 program Turn YDO YD1 and YD2 ON when the WO data is transferred from the master station ON conditio Transfers WO data to DO by initialization of WO on the master station or upon completion of INCP instruction execution Turns 70 ON upon completion of transferring WO data to DO Turns YDO ON if DO 5 Turns YD1 ON if DO 5 Turns YD2 ON if DO 5 both YDO and YD1 OFF MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mode mode composite mode mode composite mode PROGRAMMING MELSEC A 97 Read Write Program for a Word Device from the Master Station to a Local Station The following describes a program where data is read from written to the word device of the local station from the master station using the LRDP LWTP instruc
168. Y13F YAO Y120 YAF Y12F Yi140 190 Y1SF Y1i9F For MELSECNET B data link system Master station Remote I O station 1 530 MET J A3N n 12 PULA 21 AJ72 XAF T25B gt ll X4F X9F 2 YBO 130 YAO 120 YAF Y12F Y140 Y190 mm Yi15F Y19F Local station Local station Remote station No 2 No 3 No 4 X80 xo Y80 AJ72 5 P25 AIF XBF Y7F X1F 2 150 Y16F Y200 Y17F Y20F Y14F Y19F Local station Local station No 2 No 3 Y70 A A J J 71 PUI PUA T P21 M B XBF Y150 X110 Y16F Y8F X12F Y200 Y130 190 Y17F Y20F 14 Y19F OO Fig 9 11 System configuration Y7F Y12F Y1AO 1 Y1AF Remote station No 4 yao AJ72 T25B 1 Y13F Input module 7 Output module Special function module 9 MELSEC A Link device assignment 000 15F 000 186 200 294 300 3C1 260 47F 580 7FF 1A0 3BF 500 76F SLAVE PC STATIONS M ALLL INTER MITTENT 10ms MASTER lt lt lt 111137421 repre Dyer x x zzm 700 7FF 390 47F 260 36F 580 6AF 060 18F OEO 15F 100 186 030 12 250 33F 1B0 2BF 080 1AF 6D0 76F 1A0 25F 2A0 3BF 500 58F 000 09F 210 2CF 300 41F 000 t M MASTER
169. Z U U U C CI C U U A N NM N a gt gt 2 O 55 2 a gt C2 2 O U C U N gt 2 O 55 N 2 E module with link Use the station function number setting switch to set the selection of master or local REMARK gt gt O gt Z U U EE N S gt N gt z 2 gt gt gt NI NI N gt gt gt O O O Ul U U sss oio gt N gt O Q C be gt U c id gt o gt z N gt O V gt The definitions of station 2 station station Table 4 3 as follows a station Local station in the second tier master station in the third tier b 2 station Local station in the third tier station Remote station in the third tier G X G 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 3 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued Q Available 0 Applicable system system MELSECNET B data link MELSECNET data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET composite composite LM L ejr um Use the station number setting switch to set the selection of master or
170. a Link System 9 6 0 0 000 3 5 3 2 1 Overall configuration 00 3 5 3 2 2 Precautions when operating the data link system 9 3 _ G 3 2 3 oystem deviCegeeeeccccccccccc000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 7 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM 4 1to4 30 4 1 Three Tier System Using the MELSECNET Data Link System 9 99990000000000000000000000 2 4 1 1 System configuration 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 4 1 2 Precautions when operating data link system 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 4 1 3 System deviCGeS eeecccccccceccc000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 4 2 Data Link System when the Second Tier is MELSECNET and the Third Tier is MELSECNET B A 2 1 System configuration 10 4 2 2 Precautions when usi
171. a link system 0 0 2 3 2 2 MELSECNET Data Link 2 7 2 2 1 configuration 0 2 _ 7 2 2 2 Precautions when operating the data link system 2 22 3 Applicable modules 0 0 0 2 10 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM 3 1to3 8 3 1 Outline of the MELSECNET B Data Link System 3 1 3 1 1 Configuration of the data link system ee eee eee ee ee oe eese eese se se ssesossesossesessese 3 1 3 1 2 Features of the data link system 00 00 0 3 2 3 2 MELSECNET B Dat
172. ach time the link status changes Even if power of the station connected to the bypass switch is turned OFF the data link status being executed on the forward or reverse loop is kept 9 MELSEC A Table 9 5 List of MELSECNET special link registers Continued Device Name Data Description Number Stores the number of local station or remote station at which loopback is being executed Loopback Station executing forward D9205 execution station loopback f Forward loopback Reverse loopback Example 1 is stored 09205 and 3 is stored 09206 D9206 j The values stored in D9205 and D9206 are not reset to 0 when the data link returns to the normal state data link in forward loop Reset the programmable controller CPU to return the set values to Stores the time used for data link processing link scan time by D9207 Maximum value all of the local stations and remote stations in the loop currently being used for data link in 10ms unit Link scan time definition 0 END 9 END 0 a LS Link scan time 09208 Link scan time Minimum value When M lt LS END 0 6 15 Link scan time M Sequence program scan time D9209 Current value by master station LS Link scan time data link processing Stores the total number of retries conducted when a transmission error occurs Definition o
173. after a communication failure refer to this manual Malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident e When controlling a running programmable controller data modification by connecting a peripheral device or GX Developer to a CPU module or by connecting a programmable controller to a special function module create an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the entire system will function safely all the time For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 inches or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions N CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual fo
174. al station 2 When the MELSECNET mode link parameter is set using a MELSECNET II mode compatible link module the system operates in the MELSECNET mode 3 When only the first half link parameter is set using the MELSECNET composite mode the system operates in the MELSECNET mode MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mposite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS 5 4 Optical Fiber Cable Specifications The following shows the optical fiber cable specifications used for optical data link of the MELSECNET Special skills and tools are required for connecting optical fiber cables to connectors In addition dedicated connector plugs are also needed When purchasing any of the connector plugs please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd 5 4 1 SI Gl type optical fiber cable The Table 5 4 shows specifications of SI Gl type optical fiber cable Table 5 4 SI GI type optical fiber cable H PCF SI Multi particulate glass Plastic clad GI Quartz glass 12dB km 6dB km 3dB km posl Applicable connector 06 08 or equivalent Compliant with JIS C5975 5977 REMARK 1 The optical cables include the following types A type Cable for inside control panel connection B type Cable for connection between outside control panels C type Cable for outdoor connections D type Cable for reinforced outdoor connections There are special cables avai
175. al registers is enabled Even If the host station master station goes down the data before the failure will be also held When a normally operating local station detects an error at another local station the bit corresponding to the normally operating station is set to 1 The bit status of remote station always remains O Example When No 5 detects that No 4 is faulty 1 is set to bit 4 of D9216 When 09216 is monitored its value is 16 10 When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operating status the corresponding bit is automatically reset to O 9 Number D9220 09221 09222 09223 Local station parameter mismatched or remote I O station input output allocation error Data Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to No 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 MELSEC A Description Stores the numbers of the stations at which a link parameter error sent from the master station is detected by another local or remote station DEVICE NUMBER Ip15 o14 b13 612 ot1 bto eo T be o7 be bs ba T os un unum um unum un fun UR Um um 16 15 14 101 9 LR UR L R L R L R UR UR um jum ju 32 31 29 28 27 26 25
176. alf link parameters Assign 256 points for the master station M and 256 points for local station No 3 L3 with the second half link parameters Assignment for remote stations M R area M R area 16 points for the RTOP instruction and 16 points for the RFRP instruction are required for the remote station No 1 R1 No 1 requires 17 points 16 points for RTOP instruction 1 point for system for the M R area since one special function module is installed 32 points for the RTOP instruction and 32 points for the RFRP instruction are required for the remote station No 4 No 4 requires 34 points 32 points for RTOP instruction 2 points for system for the M R area since two special function modules are installed Local station Local station Remote station No 2 L2 No 3 L3 No 4 R4 data Read from Write by esa register f master D by the station station station NEN MEN Read Reading word data Write Writing word data O Usable range Fig 7 28 Link register W assignment example The empty areas marked with 1 in the M L area 2 in the M area in Fig 28 cannot be used as a substitute for data register D in the master station and all local stations Since local station No 2 is a MELSECNET compatible station the B400 to FFF range cannot be used 7 58 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 4 Master station points use
177. ally when the error state is eliminated Loopback Not executed M9243 Turned ON when loopback is executed by the host station execution Executed Received M9246 Data unreceived Turned ON when the data from the master station has not been received Received In the three tier system M9247 is turned ON when a sub slave station has Receive M9247 Data unreceived not received data from the master station for the third tier That is M9247 is Unreceived ON while M9208 is Turned ON when the link parameters have not been received from the master station M9250 Parameter Received e Automatically turned OFF when the link parameter is received unreceived Unreceived e The master station sends the link parameters to each local station every time the loop line is switched e Only effective while the loop line in which the data link is executed is online 9 MELSEC A Table 9 3 MELSECNET special link relays list Continued Device Description Number e ON OFF status depends on whether the station itself stopped the data link Turned ON when the data link is established in neither the forward loop line OFF Normal M9251 Link halt Halt nor the reverse loop line Automatically turned OFF when the data link returns to the normal state Only effective while the loop line in which the data link is executed is online Not executed Forward loop test or
178. am after it has been turned ON Turned ON when an LWTP word device write instruction is received Used in a user program as an interlock for an LWTP instruction Remains ON after the completion of word device write processing called by an LWTP instruction Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program Turned ON after an LWTP word device write instruction has been executed The execution results are stored in D9201 Used as a conditional contact to reset M9202 and M9203 after the completion of word device write processing called by an LWTP instruction Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program Turned ON when no link parameter of the host station is set or any of the settings is incorrect Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program Turned ON if a lower tier link uses device ranges B W outside the range that is set to be used by the master station in the upper tier link Check is executed only when M9209 is OFF Sets whether the B and W data controlled by the master station in the upper tier is sent to the local stations sub slave stations in the lower tier e OFF B and W data the master station is sent to the sub slave stations Band W data in the master station is not sent to the sub slave stations Turned ON when the link devices and W used by the upper tier and lower tier are not compared for match When M9209 is OFF the link parameters for
179. an error in remote station No 4 wano 09228 po HH when b3 of D9228 is Check whether communication with remote station No 4 is normal parameter transfer Detects parameter transfer of remote I O Error processing WAND station No 4 2388 Parameters being sent when b3 of D9224 is 1 Turns M10 when an error is found Reset the hand shake signal for the in remote I O station No 4 or during M10 Y58E RFRP and RTOP Resets handshake signals Y58E YnE and Y58F YnF if a communication error occurs during the execution of an RFRP instruction or an RTOP instruction by remote I O station No 4 100 instructions NO ira Start signal M3 58 Y58F X5SE X59F X Y80 to X Y9F of remote station No 4 H580 wess Kio the special function module installed in X59F nal Y58F when writing called by an X58D RFRP instruction has been completed or an RFRP instruction cannot be ex ecuted special function module error 590 eee Resets error signal X59D of the special function module signal of the special function module M3 590 COMPLETE Sequence program for remote I O station No 4 PLS M2 Turns M1 ON if the start signal is turned ON while an RFAP instruction or an RTOP instruction is not being executed 1 Stores
180. arameter assigned XE Correct the link parameter setting Is data link enabled with link devices for specific stations Is data link enabled with specific stations YES Refer to Section 10 3 3 Is data link with link devices enabled NO Refer to Section 10 3 3 There are errors for link application instruction Check the error code and modify sequence program 10 22 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 The faulty station is a remote I O station Set the master station to the STOP status NO link outputs Y is data link disabled for link inputs X YES link inputs X Turn the inputs X of a remote station ON OFF Monitor the master station link inputs X that correspond to the operated inputs X Are the master station link inputs X turned ON OFF when monitored NO Check the link parameter assignment 10 23 Forcibly turn the master station link outputs Y ON OFF on the remote 1 station turned ON OFF corresponding to the master station link MELSEC A YES Sequence program error Correct the sequence program MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNETII MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET II P 9 mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING sa MELSEC A 10 3 5 Flowchart for when the unspecified number of sl
181. area b The area used for communication between the master station and a remote station hereinafter referred to as the M R area Setting not allowed Setting allowed X Y 000 X Y 000 X Y 000 X Y 000 points used by the host station points used by the host station points used by the host station points used by the host station area R4 DR M R area a P X Y Usable for internal memory Fig 7 7 Input X and output Y assignment range 2 Inputs X and outputs Y are assigned to each station in units of 16 points to XLILIF and YOOO to YLILIF When assigning inputs X and outputs Y identical I O ranges must be assigned to the master and remote station Setting allowed Setting not allowed Master station Remote I O station Master station Remote station X200 23 1 Inputs and outputs Y are assigned to the first half link parameters the MELSECNET II mode 2 Since remote stations cannot be connected in a MELSECNET II mode the area does not need to be divided for M L and M R 7 23 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET I MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET I composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS ix qe MELSEC A 7 7 Link Parameters the MELSECNET Mode The following
182. assignment example The following describes the I O assignment of I O number for a remote I O station by GPP The I O assignment of remote station is set on the I O LOCATING screen of GPP parameters and is store to the master station The following describes the procedure for setting 0 point for an empty slot part the shaded ZY slots in Fig 7 49 in the master station and remote I O stations exemplifying the system shown in Fig 7 49 Master station Remote station Local station Remote I O station Local station 0 1 2 3 No 4 A3N xo xo XO gt 2 21 26 A 25 555 IYIY A I72 XPXLXI JxixpaviY 311 CPU 3 1 25 11 Yer el2ie 21 2 6 ele IE Y6F F YDF S Special E Empty slot The numbers used when assignment is not executed are shown in parentheses Fig 7 49 System example The assignment is set from the head address X YO to the final address of M R area The I O assignment range varies depending on the ranges assigned for the M L area and the M R area Refer to the assignment example in Fig 7 49 7 DATALINK SETTINGS mnr r mr m 1 When the M L area is assigned after the M R area When the M L area is assigned after the M R area with the link parameters the assignment is as shown in the following example a Link parameter assignment example Fig 7 50 shows the link parameter I O assignmen
183. ation can recognize the station number at which the communication error has occurred by reading the data in M9231 and D9228 to 09231 At the link devices which receive data from the remote station at which the communication error has occurred the data is maintained in a state just before the occurrence of communication error c All local stations operate normally 6 6 2 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME mms c amrm r Vmrmm F Transmission Delay Time in Two Tier System Calculate the transmission delay time in MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link system using the following times for the formulas given in Section 6 3 e Link refresh time for the master local and remote I O stations Link scan time e Scan time for the master and local stations 1 Link refresh time for the master local and remote I O stations o1 to a3 Link refresh time is time required for link refresh Refer to Section 6 1 1 Calculate the link refresh time using the formulas given in Section 6 2 2 Link scan time LS Link scan time is time required for link scan Refer to Section 6 1 1 Calculate the link scan time using the formulas given in Section 6 2 2 When data link is being executed link scan time can be checked by monitoring link or data link special registers D9207 to D9209 with a peripheral device Scan time for the master and local stations M L ocan time is defined as the time required for o
184. ation errors e Stores the accumulated number of retries due to transmission errors 09210 e Stores the accumulated number of receive errors 09240 Link card hardware fault M9210 Mode setting switch setting status of link card Checks if the mode switch is set to online 0 or 1 or offline 2 to 7 M9224 Data link status otores the data link status D9204 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 2 Events checked by local station a Data communications status with the master station Checks if cyclic data communications is normally executed M9246 Checks if cyclic communication is executed normally from the master station for the second tier when the host station is a local station for the third tier M9247 Checks if link parameters are received from the master station M9250 Checks if the host station can communicate data M9251 b Data communications with another station Check a faulty local station other than the host station D9252 D9253 he operation status of local stations other than the host station RUN STEP RUN or STOP PAUSE c Number of receive errors Checks the number of receive error occurrences D9245 d Link card hardware error M9211 e Mode setting switch setting status in the link card M9240 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS SE
185. ation mode The following three operation modes are available with the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link system The operation mode is determined by the configuration of the connected data link modules and the link parameter settings e MELSECNET mode e MELSECNET mode e MELSECNET II composite mode Refer to the manual for the individual link modules for details on the performance functions and operation of the link modules connected to the data link system Classification Operation modes MELSECNET mode MELSECNET data link system MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET 1 composite mode Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable MELSECNET mode MELSECNET B data link system MELSECNET Il mode Shielded twisted pair cable 1 OVERVIEW es 1 1 Contents of This Manual This manual explains the MELSECNET data link system and the MELSECNET B data link system The MELSECNET data link system is explained in Chapter 2 and the MELSECNET B data link system is explained in Chapter 3 Other chapters explain both systems 1 To avoid misunderstanding the table in the top right of a page indicates which system is being explained In addition when the MELSECNET data link and the MELSECNET B data link partly differ the item mainly explains the MELSECNET data link and the description unrelated to MELSECNET B data link is underlined When using the MELSECNET B data link skip the underlined sentences
186. ave stations become faulty ERROR OCCURRENCE Connect the GPP to the master station and display the LINK MONITOR screen Turn off the power of slave sta tions one at a time beginning with No 1 and check the state of link with the link monitor func tion of the master station After checking a station turn on the power of the station and then check the next slave station is correct loopback enabled Is the final slave station checked There may be a fault between the OFF slave station and the next station However if correct loop back is enabled when Station 1 is turned off the master station YES may have a fault Master station may be faulty Conduct the self loopback test at the link module which is con sidered to be faulty If it is impossible to turn off the power of the stations disconnect the data link cables to conduct the check NO YES Replace the data link module Check the link cables across a faulty position conducting the sta tion to station test Replace link cables at the faulty position 10 24 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Applicability n MUR 10 44 ERROR LED The following describes LED which turns ON when an error occurs during data link execution Error Indication Name det
187. ber cable and coaxial cable cannot be mixed in the same loop The same type of cable must be used for links within the same loop of the two tier system Optical fiber cable and coaxial cable cannot be mixed Connection using both optical fiber cable and Connection using one type of cable Permitted coaxial cable within a single loop Not permitted Coaxial cable Optical fiber cable Local station Remote Remote R emote Remote station I O station station Local Local 2 station Coaxial station cable Fig 2 4 Possibility of connection between link modules 2 Number of link device points The number of link device points X Y B W that can be used for each local or remote station is limited For details refer to Section 7 3 3 Link parameter settings Set the link parameters in the master station to operate data link The link parameters include the number of slave stations connected to the MELSECNET data link system the link device assignments and the monitoring time a Number of slave stations The total number of local and remote stations connected to the MELSECNET data link system b Link device assignment It is a setting of the range for link data communications for each station master local and remote stations For details refer to Chapter 7 c Monitoring time The maximum allowable time that local stations and
188. ble by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Startup and Maintenance Precautions N CAUTION Please read this manual thoroughly and confirm the safety before starting online operations especially program modifications forced outputs and operating status modifications which are performed by connecting the GX Developer via the MELSECNET network system to a running CPU module of other station Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm 9 85 inches away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so may cause malfunctions Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Failure to do so may cause the module to fa
189. ck test for a remote I O station set the Set the data link module to the STOP state master station to the STOP state Select the self loopback test mode Set the mode select switch to the 7 position Execute the self loopback test Determine the self loopback test results COMPLETE 3 Test result The LEDs on the link module indicate the test result The descriptions of the LEDs are as follows a Normal The following LEDs flash in order CRC OVER AB IF TIME DATA UNDER b Error The corresponding LEDs turn ON and the test is discontinued 1 When the F LOOP R LOOP and TIME LEDs turn ON a The forward loop cable is broken b The sending and receiving ends of the forward loop are not connected with a cable c The sending end of the forward loop is connected to the sending end of the reverse loop and the receiving end of the forward loop is connected to the receiving end of the reverse loop 2 When the F LOOP R LOOP and DATA LEDs turn ON a The reverse loop cable is broken b The sending and receiving ends of the reverse loop are not connected with a cable 3 When an ERROR LED other than 1 and 2 turns ON a Hardware error b The cable was disconnected during the test C A cable was broken during the test 8 18 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNETI MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 8 P
190. ction link registers W are assigned to the remote station with the link parameter The buffer memory data is read or data is written to the buffer memory in the special function module loaded to the remote I O station with the link registers Refer to section 9 8 for details on RFRP and RTOP instructions Example The following results when reading data of the buffer memory address 10 to 17 from a special function module X Y280 to X Y29F loaded in remote I O station No 1 to W200 to 207 Special function module loaded to remote I O station Master station Buffer memory Address 10 Execution of instruction Data number to be read Head device number of devices storing read data Head device number of devices storing data to be read number of special function module 9 9 0 0 0 LK m m 0 am m 40 m 8 8 00 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 3 Accessing other station with peripheral device connected to programmable controller CPU When accessing to other station from the peripheral device the station which can be accesse
191. d f H 1 1 LROP execuled j i i 1 d A A Was i Mx4 a 1X3 LSX3 L M b Ho ts M a 1 X2 LSX34 L1 L2x2e a2 M ga1 tLS HL1 a amp 2 L2X3 0 amp 2 X2 M E e da EO ED 0 EO g Eo E 7 to Eo E M 0 Ef 5 5 Fo 5 Ho Ha E EL LS NER NE 1 LS m mas TE w M 1 05 2 3 M 1 X6 LSx6 MX3 1X2 LSXx2 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATA SENDIRECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME MELSEC A 6 2 2 Link refresh time The following describes the method used for calculating the link refresh processing time The symbols used for calculating the link refresh processing time are listed below B Total number of link relays B used in all stations W Total number of link registers W used in all stations Total number of link inputs X assigned to the master station Yo Total number of link outputs Y assigned to the master station X1 Number of link inputs X used in the corresponding station Y1 Number of link outputs Y used in the corresponding station a1to Link refresh time 1 KL1 KR1 Constants KM2 KL2 KR2 Bit device constants Word device constants REMARK The refresh range of the ANUCPU
192. d and new data fragments may be transferred because link refresh be executed during sequence program operation To prevent the above use a handshake between the sending station and the receiving station Refer to Section 9 1 The Table 6 1 shows classification of link modules by link refresh timing Table 6 1 Link module classification by link refresh timing Link refresh timing Link module name After the completion After the execution of At preset intervals of a link scan an END instruction A1SHCPU A2SHCPU A0J2HCPUP21 R21 A2CCPUP21 R21 A2USCPU S1 ATSJ71AP21 R21 A2USHCPU S1 ATSJ71AP21 R21 Q2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 Q2ASHCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 AnUCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 Q2ACPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 R21 Q3ACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 Q4ACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 Q02CPU A A1SJ71AP21 R21 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME MELSEC A Table 6 1 Link module classification by link refresh timing Continued Link refresh timing Link module name After the completion After the execution of At preset intervals of a link scan an END instruction price E A A1 price E QO6HCPU A AJ72P25 O lt 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME mnr m r nv v ux usa sasaqa The link refresh will be executed only after the execution of an END instruction in a sequence program when the programs steps between step 0 and the
193. d by the host station Assignment of inputs X and outputs Y a Input and output range can be used for data link by master station The master station uses the X YO to X Y14F range as I O of host station For the data link the X Y150 to X Y7FF range can be used b Assignment of remote stations 1 Assignment of remote station No 1 Assignment range of inputs X XO to 8F Assignment range of outputs Y Y30 to 10F 2 Assignment of remote I O station No 4 Assignment range of inputs X XO to BF Assignment range of outputs Y Y80 to 19F Assignment of local stations In this example inputs X and outputs Y are not required because there is empty area in the link relay B assignment However to simplify the explanation 128 input X points and 128 output Y points are assigned 1 Assignment of local station No 2 Local station No 2 uses the X YO to 17F range as station of host station For the data link the X Y180 to 7FF range can be used 2 Assignment of local station No 3 Local station No 3 uses the X YO to 14F range as station for host station For the data link the X Y150 to 7FF range can be used Remote station Local station Local station Remote I O station No 1 No 2 X 000 X YOOO0 R 050 I O points points i used by the used by the EN Y Y Y10F host station host station X YI7F 777 The range the shaded area be used as internal memory M
194. d depends on types of access source station master station local station or remote station The basic concept is illustrated in Fig 5 3 For details on the executable functions refer to the manuals for the peripheral device and module to be used 1 Accessible station when connecting peripheral devices When peripheral device is connected to the master station host station a local station and a remote station are accessible When peripheral device is connected to a local station host station and the master station are accessible When peripheral device is connected to a remote station the master station is only accessible MELSECNET Data Link System MELSECNET B Data Link System Access target station Access source station 1 Not accessible when using GX Developer Fig 5 3 Accessibility between link modules In the system configuration in Fig 5 3 an AGGPP connected to local station No 1 L1 can execute the following operations for the master station Program read write Monitor est Remote RUN STOP PAUSE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II 9 mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS M LOS qp ws p MELSEC A 5 3 3 Automatic return function 1 Automatic return function If an error occurs to a local station or a remote station it is disconnec
195. d half link parameters for the second tier are compared with the second half link parameters for the third tier Q Consistency check is executed Table 7 5 Consistency check of link parameter settings x Consistency check is not executed Second tier operation mode and link parameters Third tier operation mode and link I MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET mode link I I parameters en First half link Second half First half link Second half link E parameters link parameters parameters parameters MELSECNET mode link parameters 3 First half link MELSECNET II parameters First half link MELSECNET II parameters 1 5 x mode Second hall link parameters x composite mode Second hall link x parameters 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es b The following consistency check is executed when there is difference between the number of link parameters set for the second tier and the number of link parameters set for the third tier 1 When two types of link parameters are set for the second tier and one type of link parameters is set for the third tier The consistency check is executed on the first half link parameters for the second tier and the first half link parameters for the third tier including the MELSECNET mode The consistency check is not executed for the second half link parameters for the second tier 2 When one type of link parameters is set for the second tier and two
196. d tier the power supplies can be turned on in the following order Master station for the second tier Local stations in the second tier including the master station for the third tier Local stations in the third tier 2 If all stations are powered on simultaneously a faulty station may be detected because of the difference on startup timing between the master station and slave stations If this occurs when the automatic return function is not set for the master station communications may not be started normally If it is set the number of retries is stored in D9210 for retry processing MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION MELSEC A 8 7 J Self diagnostics Test 1 The self diagnostics test checks link module hardware and link cables for wire break The following five items are checked with the self diagnostics test Checks optical fiber cables or coaxial cables in the entire data link Forward loop test system This test also checks the forward loop through which data link is usually performed Checks optical fiber cables or coaxial cables in the entire data link Reverse loop test system This test also checks the reverse loop which is used for loopback in the event of an error Station to station test Testing station Check
197. data register register register register Read Write by the Read Write py the Read Write iy by the Read Write py by the host host host host station station station station Fig 7 22 Link register W assignment example a The empty area marked with 1 in the M L area for the first half link parameters in Fig 7 22 cannot be used as a substitute for data registers D in the master station and all local stations This is also true for any empty area in the M L area assigned with the second half link parameters for the first half link parameterstation M L area for the second half link parameter M L area Read Reading word data Write Writing word datat O Usable range b The range that can be assigned with the second half link parameters is the range assigned with the first half link parameters final device number 1 or later In Fig 7 22 since the range of W000 to 4FF is assigned to the first half link parameters W500 or later can be assigned to the second half link parameters 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es 5 Assignment of inputs X and outputs Y In this system example inputs X and outputs Y are not to be used because there is an empty area in the link relay B assignment However to simplify the explanation 128 input X points and 128 output Y points each are assigned to local stations No 1 and No 3 Inputs X and outputs Y are not set for local sta
198. data in D9224 to 0 Determine Noa 4 Turns M14 ON if b3 09224 or is normal or not by bit 3 09228 is 1 error values 1 0 in D9228 and D9224 J COMPLETE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING sa MELSEC A 10 TROUBLESHOOTING To improve the reliability of the system it is very important to use reliable equipment In addition the other very important factor is whether or not to recover from failure immediately and certainly If a problem occurs during the data link operation check the link status following the steps below 1 Perform link monitor by GPP and check the faulty parts When the A7PU is used monitor the special link relays and special link registers to check the faulty parts 2 Check the LED indicator of link module The ERROR LED on the link module turns ON when an error occurs Check the content of error by ERROR LED which is turned ON 3 Check the connection status of data link cable Refer to Section 8 2 to check whether the station number setting and cable connection order are not wrong 10 1 Link Monitor by GPP The link status of the data link system loop state master or slave station status and the scan time can be checked by using GPP Link monitor includes the following three types a Master station link monitor
199. de compatible link module is used as a slave station communication with this station will stop 1 MELSECNET II mode oelect the MELSECNET II mode only when modules for data link are all MELSECNET mode compatible link modules Remote stations cannot be connected When connecting a remote station use the MELSECNET II composite mode a Asforlink relay B and link register W data link is possible up to 4096 points in the range of B WO to FFF b The maximum number of link points per master station or local station is 2048 bytes The MELSECNET II mode has the first half link parameter and the second half link parameter oince up to 1024 bytes can be assigned up to 2048 bytes can be used for data link Up to 1024 bytes can be used for the MELSECNET mode c Data link is possible using only a first half link parameter In this case data sent from other stations can be received at the same time because data send receive processing is executed at a time as when using the first half link parameter If the maximum number of link points per station is 1024 bytes or less perform data link with the first half link parameter only This will reduce the handshake processing of sequence programs Refer to Section 9 1 d The station for which only the first or second half link parameter is assigned can read all of the data assigned to the first and second half link parameters In the link parameter setting illustrated in Fig
200. detects the number of a faulty local or remote I O station on data linking loop and the information is stored in the corresponding bit of the data register as shown below A station is determined to be faulty if the data returned from it to the master station is not received within the specified length of time DEVICE NUMBER 515 bio 68 we sz se Jes 4 D9228 L R a L R L R z p p Y D ma T 16115 14 13 12 11 10 L R L R L R LR UR LR R LR UR UR TUR L R UR UR UR 32 31 36 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22121 20 19 18 17 LR IUR L R L R L R LR LR UR L R UR UR UR UR j UR 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 84 33 L R L R L R UR UR UR UR UR ILIR L R L R L R 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 When data is not received within the specified length of time the bit corresponding to the station number of the local station is set Example When an error at No 3 causes it to fail to return the data to the master station 1 is set for bit 2 of D9228 When D9228 is monitored its value is 4 When the loop line becomes faulty 1 is set for the bits if the stations downstream the faulty point or for all local stations e When the master station becomes faulty or the setting for the monitoring time is too small 1 is set for t
201. e found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or so
202. e AGPHP SWOGP GPPAUE system FD GX Developer For the QnACPU or Q2AS H CPU S1 use the following software compatible with the QnACPU IBM PC AT SWOIX GPPAUE system FD GX Developer For the software compatible with the QCPU A refer to Software package in QCPU A A Mode User s Manual SH 080065 When using MELSECNET and MELSECNET 10 in combination refer to the AnUCPU or QnACPU corresponding MELSECNET 10 Reference Manual MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode o 9 7 DATALINK SETTINGS Apptcabiity 0 MELSEC A 1 2 Setting of the Number of Modules Set the number of the data link modules installed to the ANUCPU QnACPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A and head numbers etc oettings must be made to the master and local stations 1 Setting items a Number of network modules Set the total number of the MELSECNET data link modules and MELSECNET 10 network modules that are installed to the ANUCPU QnACPU A2US H CPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A The setting range is 1 to 4 Note that the number of mountable data link modules is limited to two b Valid module number for other station access oet which module will be the target of other station access from the peripheral device SWAGP GPPA SWOSRXV GPPA etc or special fu
203. e controller CPU to establish a data link system via optical fiber coaxial or twisted wire pair cables The MELSECNET data link system is a system to connect link modules via optical fiber cables or coaxial cables The MELSECNET B data link system is a system to connect link modules via twisted wire pair cables 1 MELSECNET data link system In the MELSECNET data link systems up to 64 slave stations local and remote I O stations can be connected to a master station By using optical fiber or coaxial cables connect slave station No 1 to the master station and slave station No 2 to slave station 1 creating a loop system until station n is connected to the master station Master station Optical fiber or coaxial cables MELSECNET B data link systems In the MELSECNET B data link system up to 31 slave stations local and remote I O stations can be connected to the master station There is no restriction on order of connection and station order of the master station local station and remote station In addition it is unnecessary to create a loop system since each station has electrical connection S Shielded twisted pair cable Master station n 2 31 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC A 1 2 3 Differences between the MELSECNET MELSECNET B data link systems The following table shows differences between the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link systems Table 1 1 Differences between the MELSECNET data link
204. e in Three Tier System eeeeeeee eee 6 20 6 4 Time to Access Another Station from a Peripheral Device 9 9 6 22 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 5 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 3 7 6 4 7 7 7 7 1 7 7 2 7 7 3 7 8 7 9 7 9 1 7 9 2 7 9 3 7 9 4 1t07 85 Data Link Settings Overview 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 oetting of the Number of 0 165 99999 900000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000660000 2 Network Refresh Parameters 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 Link Parameters 0200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 11 Link parameters to be set for the MELSECNET mode 11 Link parameters to be set for the MELSECNET 7 12 Link parameters to be set for the MELSECNET composite mode 7 14 Monitoring Time oetting 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 17
205. e loopback mode Therefore in case of an error data link between the faulty station and the final station is disabled Example In the following diagram if the No 2 is powered off data link between No 2 3 and 4 is disabled Connection when cables are not connected between F RD on the master station and F SD on the final station and between R SD on the masterstation and R RD on the final station Master station No 1 No 2 Reverse loop Loopback Pe mos oam m Fees eee ee um mb s deb uw s b ET eee Gb us G G G EPS us WR GR aD UE UR GA GR m UR GA m UA Gm Gm See 3 Optical fiber cable wiring a When wiring optical fiber cables do not touch the optical fiber cores of the plugs or jacks and protect them from dust and dirt Attached dirt dust or oil may cause increase in transmission loss resulting in data link fault In addition do not remove the connector cover before cable connection When storing the optical fiber cable attach the connector cover to protect the connector from dust and dirt b When connecting disconnecting an optical fiber cable be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Optical fiber core Plug Jack 4 Coaxial cable wiring a Keep a distance of 100 mm 3 94inch or more between coaxial cables and other power and control cables Grounding FG of the power supply module of the base unit where the link
206. econd tier 4 3 1 System configuration Fig 4 4 shows the configuration of the three tier system Master station MELSECNET B 4 intermediate station Shielded twisted pair cable No 1 EAM o vt t te hid os ate Slave EROR Slave Slave n lt 31 Slave No n Local Local n s 64 station station Sub slave Sub slave Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable MELSECNET No 4 Remote 10 Remoeuo No 2 station station Sub slave No 3 Sub slave Local station Sub slave Any local stations indicated by shading can be used as a master station for a third tier Fig 4 4 Three tier system when the second tier is MELSECNET B data link system 1 Remote stations cannot be connected in MELSECNET II mode 2 MELSECNET B data link system has no restriction on the order of stations including master stations 4 COMPOSITION OF THREE TIER SYSTEM SE A 4 3 2 Precautions when operating the data link system This section explains precautions for configuring a three tier system 1 Setting link parameters In the three tier system setting link parameters to CPU modules for the master stations in the second and third tiers is required For link parameter setting refer to Section 5 3 7 and Chapter 7 Set the two tier link parameters station MELSECNET B M No 4 No 2 No No 1 Slave Slave Slave Slave n lt 31 No
207. ected Description status CRC error Code check error of receive data Cyclic redundancy check Cause Data sending station was disconnected at the timing Cable fault noise etc Received data were overwritten with another data received next due to delay in loading Cause Hardware failure in receiving part of link module Overrun error In the system composites with local stations and remote I O stations the OVER LED of remote I O stations are turned ON dimly However note that the module is not faulty 1 has been received consecutively more than stipulated times Receive data length is shorter than stipulated length Abort invalid frame lt Cause gt error Data sending station was disconnected at the timing Monitoring time too short cable fault noise etc Data link monitoring time is over Time check error ON Cause Monitoring time too short cable fault noise etc Data containing erroneous code have been received Data check error lt Cause gt Cable fault noise etc Internal processing of send data is not executed constantly Underrun error lt Cause gt Hardware failure in sending part of link module Forward loop line has an error Forward loop error Adjacent station was powered OFF lt Cause gt Forward loop cable disconnection or incomplete cable connection Reverse loop line has an error Reverse loop error Adjacent station was powered OFF lt Cause gt Rever
208. ed ON K15 Turns ON OFF the T6 contact at intervals of 1 5 seconds while M10 is ON Turns Y7FO Y120 of remote station 4 ON while the T6 contact is ON Turns 670 Y170 of remote station 1 ON while the T6 contact is OFF Turns M10 OFF when X500 of RST RST m10 remote I O station 4 is turned ON MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 9 P ROG RAM M N G Applicability rr 9 5 Data Link Program Using Link Relays This section presents a program for sequentially turning ON Y140 of the master station of local station No 2 and Y 70 of local station No 3 by link relays System configuration For MELSECNET data link system station Ene station Local station Local station Remote I O station No 2 No 3 No 4 x30 Y70 x20 Y30 on X80 Y70 80 21 ens Set 172 P25 P21 a X1F YBF Y7F X1F X9F p X4F X9F YSF Y7F Y9F YBO Y130 Y150 fmm U YBF Y13F Y12F Y16F Yar X12F 140 190 200 130 190 Y15F Yi9F YA7F Y20F Y14F Y19F Y13F Y1AF Input module Output module S Special function module For MELSECNET B data link system Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote I O station No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 A 30 70 X20 ig o PULA Y7O XO Y8
209. ed by the master station in the upper tier link Erro the master station Check is executed only when M9209 is OFF B and W OFF Send to the mE Sets whether the B and W data controlled by the master station in the upper transmission range second and tier is sent to the local stations sub slave stations in the lower tier for the master third tiers M9208 e OFF B and W data in the master station is sent to the sub slave stations station ON Send to the T W data in the master station is not sent to the sub slave lower tier master second tier I stations stations only only 9 MELSEC A Table 9 1 MELSECNET special link relays list Continued Device Data Description Number Link parameter OFF Check e Turned ON when the link devices B and W used by the upper tier and check instruction MM executed lower tier are not compared for match M9209 lower tier link ON Check not When M9209 is OFF the link parameters for the upper tier and lower tier master stations executed are checked only Link card error Normal 9210 Turned ON when the link card hardware is faulty master station Error Offline Online Turned ON when the master station is offline in the station to station test station to mode or in the self loopback test mode M9224 Link status station test T
210. el Description MELSECNET a MELSECNET II Remarks ADJ2HCPUR21 A1NCPUR21 CPU module with the link S function Use the station number CPU 2 21 51 setting switch to set the module A2NCPUR21 S1 selection of master or A3NCPUR21 local station A2ACPUR21 A2ACPUR21 S1 modulo with the link function A3ACPUR21 Module for data link used with any of the following CPUs AnSCPU AnUSCPU QnASCPU QCPU A Installed in an I O slot in a base unit Module for data link used with AJ71AR21 a CPU module without the link function ACPU AQJ2R25 Compact type module for Data link remote stations module Module for remote stations AJ72R25 which is to be mounted on the Installed in the CPU slot following base units of a main base unit A32B S1 A35B A38B Used only for local stations Module for data link used with A1SJ71AR23Q ee end disp sanstall d nano slot a QCPU module A1SJ71AR21 in an extension base REMARK 1 The M L and R stations in Table 2 3 indicate the following stations a M station Master station b L station Local station C R station Remote station 2 1 Applicable only when used in combination with the A2US H CPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A 3 2 Applicable only when used in combination with the AnUCPU or QnACPU 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A MEMO 2 TWO TIER SYST
211. en the farthest Overall distance Overall distance a i w G O MELSECNET MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II 9 mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS EE 2 4 Table 5 1 Performance specifications Continued MELSECNET data link system MELSECNET B data link system Coaxial cable data link Shielded twisted pair cable data link system MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode Up to the maximum I O points allowed for master station CPU module 2 Total number of slave station link points Available link points for master station 1024 points 1024 points 4096 points 512 bytes P 4096 points 512 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 1024 points 1024 points 4096 points 8192 bytes a 4096 points 8192 bytes 2048 bytes 2048 bytes 1024 bytes link parameters first half 1024 bytes link parameters first half 1024 bytes 1024 bytes 1024 bytes link parameters second half 1024 bytes link parameters second half 542 byt 512 bytes 512 bytes es A Number of I O Number of I O Number of I O points Number of I O points 512 point PON 512 points Eos oints 512 points a 512 points 1 25Mbps 125kbps 250kbps 500kbps 1Mbps Half duplex bit serial Frame synchronization E Varie
212. er Link parameters tier Link param E for the m aster the third tier rane as the M L area for Usable as area for the first half link parameters the second half link parameters Fig 7 42 Assignment when the MELSECNET II mode is used for the third tier 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 3 MELSECNET II composite mode used in the third tier a First half link parameters for the third tier 1 The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the first half link parameters for the second tier is used for the M L area 2 The M R area for the second tier and an empty area in the WO to 3FF range is used for the M R area b The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the second half link parameters for the second tier is used for the second half link parameters for the third tier Link parameters tier Link TE for the master the third tier A as the M L area for Usable as the M R area for as the area for the first half link parameters the second half link parameters the second half link parameters Fig 7 43 Assignment when the MELSECNET composite mode is used for the third tier When the MELSECNET mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode is selected as the operation mode for the third tier consider the following points when assigning device ranges 1 The device range assigned to the master station for the third tier is within the
213. er stations in the second and third tiers is required For link parameter setting refer to Section 5 3 7 and Chapter 7 Set the second tier link _ parameters station M MELSECNET B station Intermediate station station station No 1 Slave 3 Slave 2 Slave Slave Local station _ ns 31 Set the third tier link MELSECNET B parameters Local Local Remote Local Local station station station station station No 1 No 4 No 3 No 2 No Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave n s 31 2 Restriction on use of link modules Up to two of the following link modules one as a master station and the other as a local station can be used with a CPU module The two modules cannot be used only for master stations or local stations AJ71AT21B ATSJ71AT21B Master or Local station Local station Master station 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A 4 4 3 System devices Table 4 4 Link modules available for the three tier system O Available Applicable system system s data link Modul MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Remark panle MELSECNET MELSECNET ii I composite mods II composite mode mode 1 A1SJHCPU SJ71T21B 2 51 AJ71AT21B A3NCPU mode Use the station 24660 ATSJ71AT21B number setting switch to set the selection of master
214. er System Assignment The following describes the link parameter setting required to use the three tier system The link parameter setting of the three tier system is basically similar to that of the two tier system described in Section 7 7 to 7 9 Set the link parameters according to the operation mode used for each tier 7 10 1 Common element The following describes the common elements to know before setting link parameters for the third tier 1 The link relay and link register W range assigned to the master station and local stations for the third tier is the device range assigned to the host station by link parameters for the second tier The link register W range which be assigned to the remote station for the third tier is the range assigned to the remote station for the second tier and empty area Link relay B assignment range mM BO Second tier link parameters OM tm e Empty I Link parameters of the master station C f _ __ ___ L1 m for the third ier Range usable as the M L area Link register W assignment range WO 3FF Second tier link i 1 I Link parameters of 14 for the third tier Range usable Range usable as the M L area as the M H area Fig 7 30 Assignment of link relays B and link registers W 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 2 The input X output Y ra
215. er size is in units of 16 points 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A b Refresh range setting for LW 1 The refresh destinations of LW are the link register W Internal devices of CPU module W0000 LVV0000 Setting 1 2 The transfer size is in units of 1 point c Refresh range setting for LX LY 1 The refresh destination of LX is the input X and that of LY is the output Y The actual I O and later be set as the refresh destination Since this area is also used for MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET MINI CC Link etc assign it without overlapping 2 The transfer size is in units of 16 points 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 3 Setting example In the system configuration exemplified in Fig 7 4 an example of setting the network refresh parameters to assign the refresh ranges in Table 7 3 is shown below Module No 1 OtoF 10to2F 30to4F 50to6F 70to8F 90to CF x gt A n U C p U Master station Setting of the number of modules Module No 1 muet No 2 uet No 3 4 il Network module type station Network No Fig 7 4 System configuration example Table 7 3 Refresh ranges MELSECNET t Module type l Module 2 Module No 3 station Module No 1 LB LWO to FFF B WO to FFF Refresh range LX LYO to 7FF X YO to 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es a Setting screens Setting of network module No 1 O
216. er tier is allocated with the Error link parameters for the lower tier detected Turned OFF when the error is eliminated by correcting the link parameters That is M9235 is turned OFF when bits 09220 09221 all OFF Not Turned ON while a local station is communicating the initial setting data communi link parameters to a master station to execute data link processing cating Automatically turned OFF when the communication for initial data setting Communi has been completed That is M9236 is turned OFF when bits D9224 and cating D9225 are all OFF Turned ON when an error occurs at one local station within the loop Roe The relay is turned ON while a station to station test is being executed for a local station and the data link is operating Automatically turned OFF when the faulty station returns to normal That is M9237 is turned OFF when bits D9228 and D9229 are all OFF MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II P 9 mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode MELSEC A 9 2 2 Special link relays enabled only for local stations Table 9 3 and Table 9 4 show the special relays controlled only when the host station is set to local station Table 9 3 MELSECNET special link relays list Device Data Description Number M9204 LRDP instruction Uncompleted
217. ers the second half link parameters Fig 7 36 Assignment when the MELSECNET mode is used for the third tier 7 66 7 DATALINK SETTINGS msn w m a F 3 MELSECNET II composite mode used in the third tier a First half link parameters for the third tier 1 The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the link parameters for the second tier is used for the M L area 2 The M R area the second tier and the empty area in the WO to 3FF range is used for the M R area b The second half link parameters for the third tier can handle the empty area that begins after the M L area using the link parameters for the second tier However exclude the range used as M R area in the first half link parameters for the third tier Link arameters FFF Link parameters for the master station L1 m Lt m 21 for the third tier as area Usable as the M R area for for the first half link parameters the second half link parameters Usable as the M L area to be assigned for the second half link parameters Exclude the M R area assigned with the first half link parameters for the third tier Fig 7 37 Assignment when the MELSECNET II composite mode is used for the third tier When connecting a remote I O station to the third tier consider the range to be assigned to the M R area for the third tier with the link parameters for the second tier and assign it Even when t
218. es or loopback due to a slave station error The master station 00 setting is made for more than one station The monitoring time set is too short In case of forward reverse loop error the data link will be established in the reverse forward loop or the loopback mode The forward reverse loop data link is recovered when the loop returns to normal The LEDs remain in the error status even after the recovery reset the master station and execute the forward loop test reverse loop test again MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode mode 9 PROGRAMMING Aplicabily o MELSEC A 9 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes methods for programming the master and local stations to perform data link among CPU modules 9 1 Precautions for Creating Programs 1 Used link devices The device numbers assigned to each station with link parameter can be used for link devices B W X Y to be used in data link programs Writing fail safe programs Using special link relays M9200 to M9255 and special link registers D9200 to D9255 an interlock should be provided for data link programs among communication stations so that the other stations data can be used only when the data link is performed normally Data link method for data of two or more words When writing data
219. es can be used for the second tier 3 Applicable when the A1SJ71AT21B is used CPU module with link function link module 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 2 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available x C Applicable system system MELSECNET data link MELSECNET B data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Meau Mogel MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite II composite mode mode mode mode L R m a r jum efr A2USHCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 A2USHCPU 51 A1SJ71AR21 Q2ASCPU A1SJ71AP21 Q2ASCPU A1SJ71AR21 Q2ACPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 Q2ACPU S1 A1SJ71AR21 Q2ASHCPU CPU A1SJ71AP21 module Q2ASHCPU Use the station A1SJ71AR21 UAM 2 273 2 8 number setting switch link 2 lt 5 O to set the selection of modules lt 4 master or local station two A1SJ71AP21 Q2ASHCPU S1 A1SJ71AR21 QO2CPU A A1SJ71AP21 QO2CPU A A1SJ71AR21 QO2HCPU A A1SJ71AP21 QO2HCPU A A1SJ71AR21 QO6HCPU A A1SJ71AP21 QO6HCPU A A1SJ71AR21 2 MELSECNET MELSECNET II and MELSECNET II composite modes can be used for the second tier 3 Applicable when the A1SJ71AT21B is used 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 2 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available 2 Applicable system MELSECNET data link MELSECNET B data link MELSEC MELSECN
220. example when the MELSECNET II master station is set as the network module No 1 in the setting of the number of modules as shown in the example in Fig 7 3 the default values of the network refresh parameters are assigned as follows 1 The MELSECNET II master station set to module No 1 in the setting of the number of modules is assigned to the area of module No 1 shown in Table 7 1 p Module No 1 Module No 2 Module No 3 Head LU UH Network module type MELSECNETII master station LB LWO to FFF B WO to FFF Refresh range Default values LX LYO to 7FF X YO to 7FF Fig 7 3 Default ranges of network refresh parameters 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es F 2 Setting items The setting items of the network refresh parameters include the refresh ranges of LB LW LX LY SB and SW and the setting of the error history area The following describes each setting item Table 7 2 shows the network refresh parameter setting items of the MELSECNET II Table 7 2 Network refresh parameter setting items Wee o o 1 o x o x avis o x Sma x x _ O x _ Enzo lt O Available x a Refresh range setting for LB 1 The refresh destinations of LB are the link relay B Internal devices f f of CPU module Link devices BO LBO Setting 1 2 The transf
221. f a D9210 Retry count Total number stored data transmission processing error the same data is sent again Counting stops if the number of retries exceeds the maximum limit FFFFH Execute reset operation to clear the data to O 9 21 9 MELSEC A Table 9 6 List of MELSECNET B special link registers Continued Device ue Name Data Description Number Stores the station No of all local stations that are in a STOP or Stores the status of PAUSE status D9212 No 1 to No 16 NUMBER bis 614 613 12 evo bo o be 65 bs os 52 bi eo D92412 Lie css Lia ois re fez ee Ls La ta 12 1 Local station 213 1 31 529 ves tz7 ree ves 124 ves zz L21 19 7 operating status When the status of a local station changes to STOP or PAUSE the corresponding bit is set to 1 D9213 Stores the status of Example When the operation status of No 7 changes to the STOP No 17 to No 31 status 1 is set to bit 6 of D9212 When D9212 is monitored its value is 64 40 09217 0 131 30 29 127 Les 025102412 Lz2 L2 0 L19 L18 L17 When a normally operating local station detects an error at another local station the bit corresponding to the normally Stores the numbers of the station that detect the occurrence of an error at another station peice 22200084 22 O O D9216 Stores
222. f retry processing If data is lost or becomes unreliable due to the occurrence of a D9210 Retry count Total number stored data transmission processing error the same data is sent again Counting stops if the number of retries exceeds the maximum limit FFFFu Execute reset operation to clear the data to O Stores the total number of times that the forward loop is switched to reverse loop or to loopback Loop switching D9211 Total number stored Counting stops if the number of switches exceeds the maximum coun limit FFFFu Execute reset operation to clear the data to O 9 Device Number D9212 D9213 D9214 D9215 D9216 D9217 D9218 D9219 MELSEC A Table 9 5 List of MELSECNET special link registers Continued Name Local station operating status Local station error detection status Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to No 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 Stores the status of No 1 to No 16 Stores the status of No 17 to No 32 Stores the status of No 33 to No 48 Stores the status of No 49 to No 64 Description Stores the station No of STOP or PAUSE status local station s as shown below DEVICE es NE NUMBER b15 b4 b13 br2 brt bto ba be er ee es be oo D92412 tie 151 cra sa te 17
223. f the automatic return function is not set for these stations they will remain disconnected To return them to the data link perform reset operation Example If the power supply to L1 and R3 is turned off simultaneously within 100 ms while R2 is operating normally the data link for the entire system might be disabled 10 16 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode Appicabiity mode MELSEC A 10 3 3 Flowchart for when the data link is disabled at a specific station ERROR OCCURRENCE Use the link monitor to detect the error station Check the link parameters set for the error station Check that the station is connected as set with the link parameters Are there any link parameter errors Is the RUN LED on the link module of the faulty station lit Is the SD LED on the link card of the faulty station lit NO 1 When a faulty station is detected check whether any of its data link cables is disconnected or not If disconnected shut off all the phases of the external power supply and reconnect the cable Correct the link parameters and reset Has the faulty station returned to the system YES COMPLETE NO Has a programmable controller CPU stop error occurred
224. fiber cable or coaxial cable In a two tier system a master station is referred to as master station and a local station or a remote station is referred to as slave station 2 System configuration a Fig 2 3 shows the configuration of the two tier system Master station Master REN Local Local No 1 n s 64 station station Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable Slave Slave No 4 No 2 Remote Remote station station Slave No 3 Slave Local station Slave Fig 2 3 Two Tier System Remote stations cannot be connected if the MELSECNET II mode is used 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A b The following table shows the configurations of the master station local station and the remote station Type of Master stations Local stations cable CPU module with a link function CPU module link module Link module Remote station Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable Link module Optical fiber Optical fiber cable cable Optical fiber cable Link module Coaxial cable N Tc o O gt Coaxial cable Link module Coaxial cable Coaxial cable gt Coaxial cable 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM 2 2 2 Precautions when operating the data link system The following describes the precautions for performing data link 1 Optical fi
225. ftware design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ
226. g 7 20 Local system configuration example Number of assigned points a 0 d Link relays B 512 points and link registers W 512 points for the master station Link relays B 256 points and link registers W 256 points for the local station No 1 Link relays B 512 points and link registers W 256 points for the local station No 2 Link relays B 1024 points and link registers W 256 points for local station No 3 Examine the ranges to be assigned with the first and second half link parameters a Because the number of master station link points is 1088 bytes 512 8 512 x 2 1088 both the first and second half link parameters are required To simplify this explanation the number of link relays B and link registers W are halved and assigned with the first and second half link parameters each Although it is possible to assign the link relays B only with the first half link parameters and the link registers W only with the second half link parameters assign the link relays B used for handshake processing with both the first and second half link parameters Only the first half link parameters are required for the local stations No 1 to 3 because each station uses less than 1024 link points 7 43 ra area area allocated with the allocated with the second half link parameters first half link parameters DATA LINK SETTINGS mw MELSEC A 3 As
227. hat can be assigned with the first and second half link parameters is as shown below a Assign the range assigned with the first half link parameters for the second tier with the first half link parameters for the third tier Assign the range assigned with the second half link parameters for the second tier with the second half link parameters for the third tier B WO FFF Link t mme Dep us um I l 1 1 B WO i FFF ink t onmes Empty Lum n 02 Empty ot ot Empty tion Lt m in the third tier Range that can be assigned with the Range that can be assigned with first half link parameters for the third tier second half link parameters for the third tier Fig 7 32 When both first and second half link parameters are assigned for second tier b When the selected mode only provides one type of link parameter the second tier is used for MELSECNET mode or when the second half link parameters are not assigned the device range that can be assigned with the second half link parameters is the range assigned with the first half link parameters final device number 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first half link parameters for second tier B100 or later can be assigned to the second link parameters for the third tier B WO FFF u um 5 5 1 i Link parameters for Jima L1 m in the third Range that
228. he MELSECNET composite mode is used for the third tier the range which can be used as M R area is the WO to 3FF range Therefore the similar attention should be paid MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B composite mode mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS Applicability 7 10 3 Using the MELSECNET mode in the second tier The link relay B and link register W range which can be assigned to the third tier is described per operation mode used in the third tier Since the assignment of M L area for link relay B is the same as that of M L area for link register W the assignment of the link register W is only explained The link assignment range of input X and output Y is the same regardless of combinations of operation modes Refer to Section 7 10 1 5 1 MELSECNET mode used in the third tier a The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the first half link parameters for the second tier is used for the M L area for the third tier The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the second half link parameters for the second tier cannot be used b The empty area within the WO to 3FF range assigned with link parameters for the second tier is used for the M R area for the third tier M L area assigned with the first half M L area assigned with the second half link parameters link parameters T Link ameters tier wo Link parameters for the master statio
229. he RAS functions valid are only cable breakage slave station power off data link setting error and the errors that can be detected by the self diagnostics of the CPU module The RAS functions may not work depending on the fault of the data link module 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM SE A 4 Using MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode compatible modules in the same network The link module which can be connected to MELSECNET data link system includes the MELSECNET mode compatible link module and the MELSECNET mode compatible link module The MELSECNET data link system even allows MELSECNET mode compatible modules and MELSECNET II mode compatible modules to be used in the same network The MELSECNET II mode compatible link module can also be connected to the data link system of the operating MELSECNET mode The MELSECNET data link system has parameters for setting its operation mode so that various combinations of system configuration are possible The operation mode includes MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode and MELSECNET composite mode Refer to Section 1 2 for details on the differences between these modes 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM es 2 2 MELSECNET Data Link System 2 2 1 Overall configuration 1 Two tier system In two tier system up to 64 stations local and remote stations can be connected to the master station with optical
230. he bits corresponding to all local stations When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operating status the bit is automatically reset to O 9 MELSEC A Table 9 5 List of MELSECNET special link registers Continued Device Name Data Description Number Stores the station number of the local and remote stations at Stores the status of which an error is detected in the forward loop line or reverse loop D9232 No 1 to No 8 RIF Stores the status of D9233 No 9 to No 16 Stores the status of D9234 No 17 to No 24 UR 60 1 859 unsa uns F Forward loop line R Reverse loop line If a local station goes down data before the failure will be held Stores the status of When contents of D9224 to D9227 and D9228 to D9231 are No 25 to No 32 ORed and the relevant bit is 0 the corresponding bit in the above special registers is enabled Local station or remote I O station Even If the host station master station goes down the data loop error before the failure will be also held e When an error is detected at a local station and or remote I O Stores the status of 25 D9236 station in the forward loop line or the reverse loop line the No 33 to No 40 M corresponding bit is set to 1 Example When an error is detected in the forward loop line at No 5 1 is set for bit 8 of D923
231. he master station There is no restriction on combinations of local and remote stations Master station Optical fiber cable or coaxial cable n Max 64 Pu Local station MELSECNET data link system Remote 1 0 station 1 Master station The master station is the link module which controls the whole MELSECNET data link system The total number of slave stations up to 64 connected to MELSECNET data link system and the device B W X Y to perform data link are set to the programmable controller CPU of the master station using link parameter The master station controls data communications in the MELSECNET data link system by using the set link parameters 2 Slave stations There are two kinds of slave stations local stations and remote stations a Local stations When two or more programmable controller CPUs are used for data link local stations are used to increase the number of I O points and the program capacity in a large scale system b Remote stations Remote stations are used to reduce wiring costs when data must be frequently input output from to devices that are far away from a programmable controller CPU The programmable controller CPU in the master station controls the input and output of remote stations The number of I O points is 512 points X YO to 1FF per station 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A REMARK Master stat
232. hree tiers can be configured 2 Remote stations cannot be connected if the MELSECNET II mode is used 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM es 4 1 2 Precautions when operating data link system This section explains precautions for three tier system using MELSECNET data link 1 Setting link parameters In the three tier system setting link parameters to CPU modules for the master stations in the second and third tiers is required For link parameter setting refer to Section 5 3 7 and Chapter 7 Set the second tier a link parameters Local Local station station Remote Remote Vo station station Set the third tier Local station tk link parameters Local Local station i station 8 4 Third tier Remote Remote 10 yo station station Local station 2 Restriction on use of link modules a For the CPU module other than the AnUCPU A2ASCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 and Only one of the following link modules can be used with a CPU module When configuring the three tier system use a CPU module having a link function with any of the following link modules AJ 1AP21 s Second tier Second tier AJ71AP21 S3 i A1SJ71AP21 p AJ71AR21 A1SJ71AR21 cma 21 21 i Third tier Third tier 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM 3 MELSEC A b For the CPU module any of the
233. ia MELSECNET B As for the I O module and special function module connected to remote I O station online module cannot be replaced POINTS 1 2 Set the link parameters for the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link systems to the master stations only The link parameters need not be set to the local and remote stations When the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link systems are used with the QnA AnUCPU the number of modules and network refresh parameters must be set to the master and local stations For the network parameter setting method refer to the operating manual of the used GPP function software package or GX Developer In addition the QnACPU can confirm the contents of the link special relays M9200 to M9255 and link special registers D9200 to D9255 using the special relays SM1200 to 5 1255 and special registers SD1200 to SD1255 The software versions of the master station link modules that allow remote stations to be connected in the MELSECNET B data link systems are indicated below A1SJT71T21B B or later A1SJ71AT21B A or later AJ 1AT21B B or later REMARK 1 Online module replacement means replacing I O module without occurrence of UNIT VERIFY ERROR while the programmable controller is ON 1 OVERVIEW es 1 2 2 Outline of the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link systems Use a MELSEC A series programmabl
234. il or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions N CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and li where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MAN
235. in a system is as follows MELSECNET mode B WO to B W3FF 1024 points MELSECNET II mode B WO to B WFFF 4096 points MELSECNET II composite mode B WO to B WFFF 4096 points In a system with two or more master stations for the third tier as illustrated in Fig 5 8 when the link relay and link register exceeds the above mentioned points they can be expanded In this case the communication range that can be used is different from the communication range that can be used without expanding the range This section describes the link relay B and link register W range that can be expanded and the device range that can be used for data communication 1 Using expanded link relays B and link registers W a Use the master station for the third tier to turn ON special relays M9208 and M9209 when expanding to use link relays and link registers It is not allowed to turn ON either one of M9208 or M9209 Set whether to send B W data controlled by the second tier master station to local stations sub slave stations in the third tier or not This turns ON when B W data consistency is not checked between the second and third Link parameters for the second and third tiers are not checked Link parameters for the second and third tiers are checked b Use the SET instruction to turn ON special relays M9208 and M9209 as illustrated below Once turned ON do not turn these s
236. ing modules to a remote I O station in groups of input modules special function modules and output modules as shown below If the installation of I O modules is changed from a to b a reduction of 16 input assignment points and 32 output assignment points can be achieved Special Output function module 16 points pein XF X2F X4F Y4F Assigned input points Assigned output points one function 1 6 module points X2F X4F PE X7F YBF YCF e Assigned input points Assigned output points ra MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mode composite mode mode composite mode DATA LINK SETTINGS AGED Link parameter setting example The following explains the procedure for setting link parameters when a local remote 1 0 system is used in the MELSECNET mode ipe station Remote station Local station Local station Remote station No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Y 30 992 Y 70 X80 92 Y70 CPU 2 AJ72 I CPU lvarxer 8 xor 6 Input module O Output module S Special function module Fig 7 16 System configuration example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS mw rna 1 Assignment of link relays a Fig 7 17 shows the case when assigning 256 points to the master station 128 points to local station No 2 128 points to local station No 3 and 128 points empty area between local station N
237. ink parameter Fig 7 51 shows the I O assignment by link parameters Master station assignment range Number of 1 O points used by the host station assignment setting range The range marked with and Local station setting range are assumed to be used for any input and or output modules mounted or as empty slots inputs puts Y X Fig 7 51 Assignment example b I O assignment example I O ALLOCATION M SLT HO SLT I O 1 0 NO UNT NO UNT 2 16 PT 32 25 OU 400 0 x0 A W T v mb k h k ah OO NOOR OT ONO OV OA N 40 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 akh sk PRESS lt END gt WHEN Slot numbers O to 23 Assignment of I O modules in the master station 24 to 38 Range marked with an asterisk and local station setting range the 170 to AFF range 39 to 54 Assignment of remote station No 3 55 to 7O Assignment of remote station No 1 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION poe MELSEC A 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION This chapter describes procedures for data link and startup station number setting and precaution
238. ink refresh is communications of data link within a link module 1 Link refresh for a master station or local station is executed when link data is communicated between the link data storage area and the data memory storage area 2 Link refresh for a remote station is executed when link data is communicated between the link data storage area and the I O module or special function module Master station Local station ink Link module CPU module dj refresh for station Link data 2 storage area Remote I O station Link refresh for a remote station Link refresh for p esee a master station Link storage x Link scan 2 eJ Fig 6 1 Link data communications MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING Er meom mm s AND PROCESSING TIME Applicability n 6 1 2 Link refresh execution timing The link refresh executing timing can be divided into the following three types 1 Immediately after the completion of a link scan A link refresh will be executed when a link scan is completed The sequence program Will be interrupted 2 After the execution of an END instruction in sequence program A link refresh will be executed only after an END instruction has been executed in a sequence program 3 Atsetting time A link refresh will be executed at the time defined by the user beforehand For 1 or 3 data containing both ol
239. ion No 4 and station No 5 is broken Master station Station No 8 tation No 1 Data link in forward loop Station No 7 Station No 2 Station No 6 Station No 3 Station No 5 Station No 4 Broken cable Reverse loop data link Master station Station No 8 Station No 7 Station No 6 Station No 3 Data link station Received in forward loop Sent in forward loop Received in reverse loop Sent in reverse loop o ODO OAT Station No 4 Broken cable Fig 5 5 Reverse loop data link When one master station and eight slave stations are used 5 21 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 4 Data link when both the forward and reverse loops are faulty When a fault occurs to the cables of forward and reverse loops and the cable connecting connector the link loops back toward the master station in front of faulty station and data link is maintained by the normally operating Faulty stations are all disconnected When the faulty part is returned to normal the data link in the forward loop is recovered Whether the station will remain disconnected or return to the data link depending on the setting of the automatic return function Refer to Section 5 3 3 Station No 1 Data link in forward loop Station No 2 Station No 6 Station No 3 Broken cable Station No 4 Q Data link station S Sent in forward loop Received in forward loop Loopback data link station
240. ion between the master station and local stations and the M R area for communication between the master station and remote I O stations and assign them Refer to Section 7 6 3 WO 100 180 200 300 340 380 Fig 7 15 Link register W assignment example 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es 3 Assign the input X and output Y range used for data link to the I O number used in the I O module and special function module by the master station I O Refer to section 7 6 4 a Divide the area used for data link into an M R area for communication between the master station and a remote I O station and an M L area for communication between the master station and a local station to assign the range b M L area is used when the number of link relay B points is insufficient Therefore it is not necessary to assign the M L area when there is sufficient number of link relay B points 4 Make sure that the number of link points per station is as follows Refer to Section 7 6 1 e Master station 1024 bytes or less e Local station 1024 bytes or less Remote station 512 bytes or less Inputs and outputs is 512 points or less of X YO to 1FF 1 If the M R area used by the system is used incorrectly in a user program data cannot be read written correctly when the RFRP RTOP instruction is executed 2 The number of link points can be reduced by mount
241. ion is performed The accessible station varies as shown in Table 2 1 depending on which one of the master station local station and remote I O station is connected to peripheral device or mounts special function module For the function executable in the peripheral device and special function module refer to the manual for the peripheral device and special function module in use Table 2 1 Accessible Stations With a Peripheral Device Station where peripheral device is connected Access target station Master Station Local Station Remote I O Station Local Station Not accessible Not accessible Remote I O Station Not accessible Not accessible REMARK 1 e When the AnACPU P21 R21 ANUCPU A2US H CPU S1 or QCPU A is used the LRDP LWTP RFRP RTOP instructions of the dedicated instructions can also be used For details of the instructions refer to the Type ANSHCPU AnACPU AnUCPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Dedicated Instructions IB 66251 When the QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 is used the ZNRD ZNWR RFRP RTOP instructions of the data link instructions can also be used For details on the instructions refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 Not accessible when using GX Developer 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM 3 Improved RAS Reliability Availability Serviceability functions a Loopback function If a cable breaks or the power
242. ions local stations and remote stations are expressed in the following symbols e Master station M e Local station L Local station No n Ln Remote station R remote station No n Rn 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM mms SECO 2 1 22 Features of the data link system The following describes features of MELSECNET data link system 1 Cyclic transmission function The cyclic transmission is a function to periodically communicate data between a master station and slave stations local stations and remote I O stations Either 1 n or 1 1 data communications are enabled by the cyclic transmission a 1 n data communications This is data communications between the master station and all local stations between local stations ON OFF data and 16 bit data can both be communicated 1 ON OFF data is communicated using the link relay B 2 16 bit data is communicated using the link register W Data flow of B Ws allocated to the master station Data flow of B Ws allocated to local station No 1 Data flow of allocated to local station No n Fig 2 1 Flow of data by B W communication b 1 1 data communications This is 1 1 data communications between the master station and a local station between the master station and a remote station ON OFF data can be communicated using inputs X and ou
243. k module ensure the space for bending equal to or larger than the minimum allowable bend radius in Table 8 2 For the connector A and allowable bend radius r of optical fiber cables contact Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Table 8 2 Minimum allowable bend radius Allowable Connector Cable bend radius Data link mondi 2V Coaxial cable 2 Doubling link cables Connect the optical fiber cables or coaxial cables in duplex loop If the cables are not connected using both the forward and reverse loop or if the final station is not connected with the master station and therefore the cables are not connected in duplex loop the data link is maintained only at normal operation but disabled in case of an error a Connecting cables only in forward loop or reverse loop disables data link to all stations Example In the following diagram if the No 1 is powered off the data link to all stations is disabled and the faulty station cannot be detected with the link monitor Connection only in forward loop Master station No 1 No 2 EE ERE MEE E GR CM E RM DE WE EMEN RS 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION n b If cables not connected between F RD on the master station and F SD on the final station and between R SD on the master station and R RD on the final station the data link is established in th
244. k registers W used by the two tier link cannot be used for sending data to the local stations connected to any of the third tier links They be used to send data to the master stations L1 m L2 m Ln m for the third tiers This is because these master stations execute communication with the master station for the second tier as local stations for the second tier b The devices in the range set by the link parameters for the master station for the third tier cannot be used for sending data to the master station for the second tier and the local stations for the two tier link The master station for the third tier can only receive data from the local stations connected to the host station For example L1 m can only receive data from 1 and 22 The expanded link relay B and link register W device range that can be used for communication in the system configuration in Fig 5 8 is shown in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Communication range when the link relay B and link register W ranges are expanded Sending Receive data read range Link parameter data write Device range setting station L1 m L2 m L3m 21 22 2 1 2 2 Remarks station OM o x BMWOtO7F to 7F the stations connected to the 1 tier RT L2 m L3 m perm M for the second tier 2 2 the third tier link is not L1 m B W200 to 2FF Only the stations connected to the Master station E tier 1 L1 m 21
245. l stations can read the entire range of link relays B and link registers W assigned by the link parameter The read write range of each station is explained by showing Fig 5 1 as an example System Configuration Fig 5 1 Two tier system configuration 5 8 5 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A Link parameter setting range B WO 100 200 300 380 3FF Read write permitted range R meading range W Writing range Usable as internal relays or data registers D Master station M B WO 100 200 300 380 L1 2 13 R R R When BO is turned ON in the M station for example BO in the L1 L2 and L3 stations is also turned ON Local station No 1 L1 B WO 100 200 300 380 3 M L1 L2 L3 W R R When B100 is turned ON in the L1 station for example B100 in the M L2 and L3 stations is also turned ON Ti Local station No 2 L2 B WO 100 200 300 380 3 M L1 L2 L3 R W When 200 is turned in the L2 station for example 200 the L1 and L3 stations is also turned ON T Local station No 3 L3 B WO 100 200 300 380 3 M L1 2 13 W When B300 is turned ON in the station for example 00 in the L1 and L2 stations is also turned ON Tl F REMARK To simplify the example the same number is assigned to link relays B and link registers W In actual use the nu
246. lable for moveable applications and resistance to heat Contact your Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd for details MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNETII MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS M LOS ws MELSEC A 5 5 Coaxial Cable Specifications This section describes the specifications of coaxial cable used for the coaxial data link The high frequency coaxial cables 3C 2V and 5C 2V conforming to JIS C 3501 are used as Coaxial cables 5 5 1 Coaxial cable specifications The specifications of the coaxial cable are shown in Table 5 5 Select coaxial cables that meet the operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C shown in the general specifications of the programmable controller Table 5 5 Coaxial cable L 9 5 5 x 20 s x 5 X Structure E XX 2 Xo e D gt Internal condcuctive Insulating materisl material External conductive External material sheath Cable diameter 5 4mm 0 21inch 7 4mm 0 29inch Allowable bend radius 22mm 0 87inch more 30mm 1 18inch or more Internal conductor 0 5mm 0 02inch Annealed copper wire 0 8mm 0 03inch Annealed copper wire diameter Insulator diameter 3 1mm 0 12inch Polyethylene 4 9mm 0 19inch Polyethylene Exte
247. le controller CPU The programmable controller CPU in the master station controls the input and output of remote stations The number of I O points is 512 points X YO to 1FF per station REMARK Master stations local stations and remote stations are expressed in the following symbols Master station M Local station L Local station No n Ln Remote I O station R remote I O station No n Rn 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM n 9 3 1 2 Features of the data link system The features of the MELSECNET B data link system are described below 1 Cyclic transmission function The cyclic transmission is a function to periodically communicate data between a master station and slave stations local stations and remote stations Either 1 n or 1 1 data communications are enabled by the cyclic transmission function a 1 n data communications This is data communications between the master station and all local stations between local stations ON OFF data and 16 bit data can both be communicated 1 ON OFF data is communicated using the link relay B 2 16 bit data is communicated using the link register W Master station Data flow of B Ws allocated to the master station Data of B Ws allocated to local station 1 Data flow of B Ws allocated to Local Local local station n s
248. link points First half link parameters B points LY poims 2 x W points lt 1024 bytes Second half link parameters pers 2 W points lt 1024 bytes MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS j CL 25 m MELSEC A 2 Maximum number of link points per remote station The maximum number of link points which can be assigned to a remote station is 512 I O points X YO to 1FF or less and the total link data size must be set to 512 bytes Use the following formula to calculate the maximum number of link points X points Y points 42 W points lt 512 bytes 8 X points 512 bytes Y points lt 512 bytes Note that the maximum number of I O points that can be used in a remote I O station is 512 points for the total of input output and special function modules 7 6 2 Determining the link relay B assignment range Assign link relays B as follows 1 Assign link relays B in units of 16 points BLILIO to BLILIF 2 The device range that can be assigned to the second half link parameters is the range assigned to the first half link parameters final device number allocated with the first half link parameters 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B100 or later can be assigned to the
249. local station at which the communication error occurred either M9211 or M9250 and M9251 are turned ON Communication with other normally operating stations continues The link special relays M M9240 to M9255 except M9250 and M9251 and link special registers D D9243 to D9255 of the local station hold data in the state just before the communication error b The master station can recognize the station number at which the communication error has occurred by reading the data in M9237 and D9228 to D9231 At the link devices which receive data from the local station at which the communication error has occurred the data is maintained in a state just before the occurrence of communication error 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING AND PROCESSING TIME mm Normally operating local stations can recognize the station number at which the communication error has occurred by reading the data in M9255 and D9252 to D9255 At the link devices which receive data from the station at which the communication error has occurred the data is maintained in a state just before the occurrence of communication error d All remote I O stations operate normally 3 When a communication error occurs at a remote I O station a At the remote station all of the output points of the output modules and special function modules installed to the host station are turned OFF b The master st
250. ly performed to the slave stations set with the link parameters All other slave stations are processed as off line mode stations 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION 8 3 Setting Communication Speed The overall distance of the MELSECNET B data link system depends on the communication speed oet the communication speed with the switch setting of link modules For the setting refer to the manual for the link module The relationship between set communication speeds and overall distances is shown in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Communication speeds and overall distances Communication speed M bps Overall cable distance m ft 0 125 1200 3937 2 0 250 600 1968 6 0 500 400 1312 4 REMARK The overall distance refers to the distance between link modules connected to both ends Overall distance MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mposite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION rr 8 4 Optical Fiber Cable Coaxial Cable Wiring This section describes a method for connecting optical fiber cables or coaxial cables with link modules 8 4 1 Precautions for wiring The following describes wiring precautions for optical fiber cables and coaxial cables for MELSECNET 1 Securing space for the cables The minimum allowable bend radius for optical fiber cables and coaxial cables are defined To connect a coaxial cable with a data lin
251. m is KNPEV SB0 5SQx 1P For details refer to Section 5 6 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A 3 2 3 System devices Table 3 2 shows the link modules that can be used in the MELSECNET B Data Link oystem Table 3 2 List of link modules O Available Applicablesystem system M system Description Link module CPU module MELsECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Remarks NET I II composite mode mode mode Program capacity capacity Number of I O points ee m A2ACPU 14k steps 512 points A2ACPU S1 14k steps 1024 1024 points A3ACPU 30k steps s points AJ71AT21B A2UCPU 14k steps 512 points A2UCPU S1 14k steps 1024 1024 points A3UCPU 30k steps EN points A4UCPU 30k steps 4096 points Q2ACPU 28k steps 512 512 points Q2ACPU S1 60k steps points ACP 2k st 204 int A1SJHCPU to set the selection of 8k steps 256 points I A1SHCPU master or local station 14k steps 512 points 1024 points 1024 points A1SJ71 512 points iene Q2ASCPU S1 1024 points 512 points Q2ASHCPU S1 1024 points 4096 points QO6HCPU A A1SJ71AT23QB QO6HCPU 4096 points Used only for local stations Installed in an I O slot in an extension base unit O O O O O T gt gt gt N N N N N NIN Nh NO NO N gt gt gt gt on I O I O 42 42 o 100 O U O U I O I O O O U U U U S U O U 9 m U U c CIC
252. mable controller CPU 4 AMELSECNET compatible local or remote station is connected to a station number where MELSECNET II compatible station local station is set with link parameters 5 Ihe station is disconnected due to loopback processing Check the loopback with the display of loop status of the data link system described in 4 6 Incorrect cable wiring For the optical fiber cable the connection is incorrect communication with master station D9228 to 09231 Link parameter communication is executed only once at the time of starting communications Possible causes to display P continuously are as follows 1 A remote station is connected to a station number set as the MELSECNET mode local station with the link parameters 2 Alocal station is connected to a station number set as a remote I O station 3 A remote station is connected to a station number set as a MELSECNET compatible local station in the MELSECNET II composite mode with link parameters 5 column Displays present CPU operation status 09212 to 09215 R Run status S Stop status Only R is displayed for a remote station 10 4 10 TROUBLESHOOTING es column An error will occur to the master station for the third tier if there is an error in the third tier link parameters set for the corresponding station D9220 to D9223 When the both inputs X and outputs Y are
253. master station and all local stations Cyclic transmission One to one communication between the master station and a slave station Inputs X and outputs Y are used for communication between the master station and a remote I O station and communication between the master station and a local station b Communication between the master station and all local stations Link relays B and link registers W are used for communication between the master station and a local station and communication between two local stations 1 Function to communicate only when it is requested 2 The transient transmission function includes the following three types a The master station executes LRDP or LWTP instruction to read write devices T C D W of the Transient transmission Bonet local station unction b The master station executes an RFRP or RTOP instruction to read write buffer memory of a special function module mounted to a remote station c Peripheral devices installed to the programmable controller CPU accesses to other stations Even if a local station or a remote station is disconnected from the data link system due to a fault this Automatic return function function automatically returns the disconnected station to the system when the normal operation state is restored 1 Because of double configuration of optical fiber cable and coaxial cable when a cable breaks or a local Loopback fu
254. mber can be separately assigned to link relays B and link registers W 5 9 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 0 Three tier system configuration 1 In the configuration of the three tier system the link parameters are set in the master station for the second tier and the master station for the third tier 2 The master station and local stations for the second tier including the master station for the third tier can read the range assigned by the link parameters of the master station for the second tier 3 The local stations for the third tier can read the entire range assigned by the link parameters of the master station for the third tier and the range assigned to host station the master station for the second tier by the link parameters of the master station for the second tier The range assigned to the local stations for the second tier and the range assigned by link parameters of the master station for other third tier cannot be read The read write range of each station is explained by showing Fig 5 2 as an example System configuration z 3 T a o e 8200 8280 8200 8300 5 Talat 8 B200 B280 B2C0 H B300 I T F T P Lbs 5 8 Tetateal BO 8200 B280 E B2C0 Set link parameters to the stations Fig 5 2 Three Tier system configuration 5 SPECIFICATIONS 5
255. module module 16 32 XF X2F Y5F X7F x Input assignment points Output assignment points 16 points Output f Output module imodule 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es Link parameter setting example Fig 7 12 shows a link parameter setting of a remote system when the MELSECNET mode is used Master station Remote I O station No 1 Remote I O station No 2 XSF YSF Fig 7 12 System configuration example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS mm w r 1 Assignment of link relay B Data link cannot be executed by using a link relay in a remote system Setting at link parameter is unnecessary 2 Assignment of link register W a Assignment for remote I O stations M R area M R area 1 Assign 16 points for the RTOP instruction and 16 points for the RFRP instruction in the user program of the master station as remote station No 1 No 1 requires 17 points 16 points for 1 point for OS for the M R area because one special function module is installed 2 Assign 32 points for the RTOP instruction and 32 points for the RFRP instruction in the user program of the master station as remote station No 2 No 2 requires 34 points 32 points for RTOP 2 points for OS for the M R area because two special function modules are installed Remote station 1 Remote I O station 2 Master station M R1 R2 ste asa Read from W
256. mposite mode mode mode composite mode 9 7 DATALINK SETTINGS Apptcabiity 0 MELSEC A 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS This chapter describes the setting of the number of modules and the setting of the network refresh parameters and link parameters which are required for communications with other stations in the data link system 7 1 Data Link Settings Overview oet the number of modules and the network refresh parameters only when the AnUCPU QnACPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A is used The data link system can use any of the three operation modes according to the combination of link modules to be connected The operation mode can be selected by link parameter settings MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode e MELSECNET II composite mode Set the link parameters by using a peripheral device and store them in the programmable controller CPU of a master station Use the following peripheral device or software which is compatible with the AnACPU or later to set link parameters for the MELSECNET II mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode AGGPP SW5GP GPPAE system FD AGPHP SW5GP GPPAE system FD BM PC AT SWOIX GPPAE system FD GX Developer The following describes link parameters required to use each operation mode 1 For the ARUCPU A2ASCPU S1 or A2USHCPU S1 use the following peripheral device or software compatible with the AnUCPU or later e AGGPP SWOGP GPPAUE system FD
257. n L1 m in L 1 m the third tier Usable as the area Usable as the M L area Fig 7 38 Assignment when the MELSECNET mode is used for the third tier 2 MELSECNET II mode used in the third tier a The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the first half link parameters for the second tier is used for the first half link parameters for the third tier b The range assigned to the master station for the second tier with the second half link parameters for the second tier is used for the second half link parameters for the third tier If no area is set to the second half link parameters use the area that begins after the M L area assigned to the first half link parameters for the second tier M L area assigned with the first half area assigned with the second half s link parameters link parameters F Link parameters Link parameters for the master the third tier Usable as col area to for the first half Usable as the M L area to for the second half link parameters link parameters Fig 7 39 Assignment when the MELSECNET II mode is used for the third tier 7 68 7 DATALINK SETTINGS mm ny r 3 MELSECNET II composite mode used in the third tier a First half link parameters for the third tier 1 The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the first half link parameters for the second tier is used for the M L area 2 The empty area within the WO t
258. n completed LWTP instruction received LWTP instruction completed Link parameter error in the host station Link parameter inconsistency with the master station B and W transmission range for the master station lower tier master stations only Link parameter check instruction lower tier link master stations only Link card error master station Link status MELSEC A Table 9 2 MELSECNET B special link relays list Data Unreceived Received Uncompleted Completed Unreceived Received Uncompleted Completed Normal Error Normal Error Send to the second and third tiers Send to the second tier only Check executed Check not executed Normal Error Offline Online station to station test or self loopback test Description Turned ON when LRDP word device read instruction is received Used in a user program as an interlock for an LRDP instruction Remains ON after the completion of word device read processing called by an LRDP instruction Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program Turned ON after an LRDP word device read instruction has been executed The execution results are stored in D9200 Used as a conditional contact to reset M9200 and M9201 after the completion of word device read processing called by an LRDP instruction Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user progr
259. n Local Local Set the three tier link n 64 station station 91 parameters i Sub slave Sub slave MELSECNET 4 Remote 0 Remote YO No 2 station station Sub slave No 3 Sub slave Local station Sub siave 2 Restriction on use of link modules a For the CPU module other than the A2ASCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 and QCPU A Only one of the following link modules can be used with a CPU module When configuring the three tier system use a CPU module having a link function with any of the following link modules AJ71AP21 t t AJ71AP21 83 Second tier Second tier A1SJ71AP21 Va ATA AJ71AR21 Ne 313 A1SJ71AR21 AJ71AT21B B Cla A1SJ71AT21B R ult REN 21 57 Third Third 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM mms 3 For master station AJ71AT21B A1SJ71AT21B b For the CPU module any of the ANUCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 and QCPU A Up to two of the following link modules one as a master station and the other as a local station can be used with a CPU module The two modules cannot be used only for master stations or local stations For local station AJ71AP21 AJ71AP21 S3 A1SJ71AP21 AJ71AR21 A1SJ71AR21 Master or Local station Local station Master station When using a CPU module with link function as a ma
260. n No 1 01 remote I O station local station No 3 03 No 2 2 X70 X70 CPU X1F d X7F Y150 Y80 YFO Yar Yer YFF Input module O Output module S Special function module Fig 7 44 Three tier system configuration example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A Table 7 6 Number of assignment point for each station Second half link First half link parameter parameter 1 Checking the operation mode to be used a Operation mode of the second tier MELSECNET II composite mode This is because the slave stations local stations and remote stations are connected to either MELSECNET mode compatible station or MELSECNET I mode compatible station b Operation mode of the third tier MELSECNET composite mode This is because the slave stations local stations and remote stations are connected to either MELSECNET mode compatible station or MELSECNET I mode compatible station 2 Checking the range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the link parameters for the second tier a According to the number of assignment point in Table 7 6 384 points for link relay B and 384 points for Link registers W are required for the first half link parameters and 256 points for link relay B and 256 points for link register W are required for the second half link parameters b 34 points for M R area and 32 points for M R area are required for the M R area At least 66
261. nction module AJ71C24 S8 AD51H S3 etc incompatible with the ANUCPU QnACPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 Q2AS H CPU S1 or QCPU A The setting range is 1 to 4 c Head Number Set the head I O number first digits of 4 digit hexadecimal of the data link module installed For example set 5 if the I O numbers are X Y50 to GF In GX Developer set it in 4 digits In the above example enter 0050 d Network module type name Select the type of the data link module installed from the followings 5 MELSECNET II master station 6 MELSECNET II local station e Network No This setting is not required for the MELSECNET II 7 DATALINK SETTINGS msn w m a F 2 Setting example An example of setting the number of modules is shown below a System configuration example Module No 1 OtoF 10 2 30to4F 50to6F 70to8F 90toCF gt Master station Fig 7 1 System configuration example b Setting screen Fig 7 2 shows the setting screen for the above system configuration example NO OF MODULES 1 4 MODULE ACCESSED BY 1 MODULE 1 MODULE 2 MODULE3 MODULE 4 STATION 11 d adu NETWORKNO Fig 7 2 Screen for setting the number of modules MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode ar 222 I MELSECNET MELSECNET II mposite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS
262. nction or remote station is disconnected from the system the faulty part is removed so that the normal operation can be maintained by normally operating stations Error detection 1 Faulty parts can be detected by reading data of the special relays and special registers Self diagnostics function 1 Checks link module hardware and optical fiber cable coaxial cable 1 The link relays B and link registers W that can be used in a three tier system are as follows ae meds aoa B WO to 3FF 1024 points i mode Tsuna B WO to FFF 4096 points relays B and link registers W in three tier composite mode system 2 Function to redundantly use the same device number in the three tier system if the available number of points of link relays B and link registers W in the three tier system is not sufficient 1 The data link system includes three different operation modes MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II MELSECNET mode mode and MELSECNET I composite mode MELSECNET I mode 2 The above mentioned operation mode can be selected and used depending on the data link module to MELSECNET II be used composite mode The data link for the entire MELSECNET I device range B W0 to FFF while maintaining compatibility with the conventional MELSECNET mode MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode
263. ned ON by the SET instruction If an OUT or PLS instruction is used the RTOP instruction will not be executed correctly Reset and initialize YnF and the RTOP execution start signal after the execution is completed When failing to do so reading cannot be executed again Refer to the manual for each special function module for addresses where each data of the special function module is stored 9 es 5 Write an error detection circuit sequence program to check the operation from error occurrence to initial communication completion when an error occurs to a local or remote I O station a Whether an error has occurred in a local or remote station or not can be determined by 1 0 of bit corresponding to the specified station of D9228 to 09231 When the bit corresponding to the specified station is 1 it means that an error Occurs b Whether the initial communication is being executed or not be determined by 1 0 of bit corresponding to the specified station of D9224 to D9227 When the bit corresponding to the specified station is 1 it means that initial communication is being executed c The occurrence of an error and the execution of initial communication in a local station or a remote station are detected in the following timing Detection of normal condition Error detection _ Initial communication T completion Initial comm
264. ned to the second half link parameters is the range assigned to the first half link parameters final device number 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B100 or later can be assigned to the second half parameters If O point is assigned to the first half link parameters assignment of the second half link parameters can be started with WOOO 1 When only the RFRP instruction is used set the M R area used by the system in the link parameter 2 If the M gt R area used by the system is used incorrectly in a user program data cannot be read written correctly when the RFRP RTOP instruction is executed MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET I composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS j CL RU E PUE MELSEC A 7 6 4 Determining the input X and output Y assignment range Assignment of input X and output Y can be executed to the link parameter of MELSECNET mode and the first half link parameters of MELSECNET II composite mode Input X and output Y which can be used in the data link is the range installing the I O module and special function module by the master station or local station or later 1 Divide inputs and outputs as shown below and assign them a The area used for communication between the master station and a local station hereinafter referred to as the M L
265. ng data link eeeee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee esee esos ececeececeosccccccseceee 11 4 2 3 oystem deviCeSeeecececcccccccc000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 13 4 3 Data Link System when the Second Tier is MELSECNET B and the Third Tier is MELSECNET 4 3 1 System configuration 10 4 3 2 Precautions when operating the data link system eee eee ee eee eee eeesceccesee 20 4 3 3 System 22 4 4 Three Tier System using the MELSECNET B Data Link System 9000000000 000000000 27 4 4 1 System configuration 27 4 4 2 Precautions when using data link 28 4 4 3 oystem deviCeSeeecccccccccccc00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
266. nge that be assigned to the master station for the third tier can use the area starting from the I O use range of host station This is the same range as assignment range of the master station for the second tier If inputs X and outputs Y are used to establish data link between the master station for the third tier and the master station for the second tier the assignment range of the master station for the third tier should exclude this range Link with inputs X and outputs Y in only the Link with inputs X and outputs Y in the second and third tier third tiers 000 000 I used for I O Range used for 1 by I the host station the host station ETT used for link with master station in ETT tier Area usable for third tier Area usable for third tier X Y7FF X Y7FF Fig 7 31 Assignment of inputs X and outputs Y When A3NCPU is used 3 Table 7 4 lists the nine types of combinations 1 to 9 depending on the operation modes set for the second tier and the third tier Table 7 4 Operation mode combinations for second third tier Second tier operation mode Third tier operation MELSECNETI mode MELSECNET mode MELSECNETI mode composite mode mE MELSECNETII mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 4 When the MELSECNET mode or MELSECNET composite mode is selected the link relay B and link register W range t
267. nk points per station is as follows Refer to Section 7 6 1 eMaster station 1024 bytes or less eLocal station 1024 bytes or less 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es Link parameter setting example Fig 7 8 shows a link parameter setting of a local system when the MELSECNET mode is used Master station Local station No 1 Local station No 2 Fig 7 8 System configuration example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 1 Assignment of link relay a Fig 7 9 shows the case when assigning 256 points to the master station 128 points to local station No 1 128 points to local station No 2 and 128 points empty area between local station No 1 and local station No 2 Master station Local station No 1 Local station No 2 Used as Used as Used as internal internal internal relay M relay M relay M by the by the host host station Coil ON OFF control of link relays B Contact Reads ON OFF data using link relay B contact O Usable range Fig 7 9 Link relay B assignment example b The empty area marked with 1 in the M L area in Fig 7 9 cannot be used as a substitute for internal relay M in the master station and all local stations The M L area is the range BO to 27 from the minimum device number to the maximum device number assigned by the link parameters 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es l 2 Assignment of link register W a Assignment for
268. not set to a remote I O station with link parameters or when assignment of the master station and installation position of the module of the host station are wrong an error will occur 0 Normal E Error B column Displays whether a local station has detected an error at other local stations D9216 to D9219 0 Error has not been detected E Error has been detected Only 0 is displayed for a remote station C column Displays the forward loop line status of each slave station D9232 to D9239 0 Normal E Error D column Displays the reverse loop line status of each slave station D9232 to D9239 0 Normal E Error 1 In the MELSECNET data link system forward reverse loop errors of the master station and slave stations are detected at the receive end Possible causes for forward reverse loop errors are as follows a Broken or loose loop cable connection b Hardware failure at receive end c Hardware failure at send end In the system configuration shown below if the forward loop of L3 becomes faulty the forward loop cable that connects L2 to L3 might be broken or loose the hardware at the forward loop send end of L2 might be faulty or the hardware at the forward loop receive end of L3 might be faulty If the cable that connects L5 and R6 is broken or loose a reverse loop error for L5 will occur Heverse loop receive erid 2 If the status of a slave station displayed in L col
269. ns be connected to a master station for the second tier b For the third tier up to 31 local and remote I O stations can be connected to the master station which is the local station for the second tier 4 4 1 System configuration Fig 4 5 shows the configuration of the three tier system Master station MELSECNET B Shielded twisted pair cable 7 7 7 Local No 4 Local Local Local station 4 Intermediate Station 4 station station station No 1 Slave No 3 Slave No 2 Slave No n Slave Local station SPE IS n s 31 Master station 7 Slave MELSECNET B Shielded twisted pair cable Third tier Local Local bz ote Local Local station station etalon station station No 1 Sub slave No 4 Sub slave 3 Sub slave No 2 Sub slave No n Sub slave lt 31 Any of the local stations indicated by shading be used as a master station for a third tier Fig 4 5 Three tier system configured with MELSECNET B data link system 1 Remote I O stations cannot be connected in MELSECNET II mode 2 MELSECNET B data link system has no restriction on the order of stations including master stations 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM es 4 4 2 Precautions when using data link This section explains precautions for configuring a three tier system 1 Setting link parameters In the three tier system setting link parameters to CPU modules for the mast
270. ns Create a program with referring to the transmission delay time described in Section 6 2 Precautions for transient transmission execution using link instructions a LRDP LWTP These instructions can only be executed at one point in the same system They cannot be executed simultaneously at two or more points b RFRP RTOP These instructions cannot be executed at two or more points in a special function module If initial settings have been made in a program for the buffer memory in the special function module on the remote station create the program so that when only that remote station is reset by powering it off or by turning on the reset switch of the network module on the remote station the master station will detect the status and initial settings will be made to the special function module again Initial settings are made to the special function module when a Setting sampling period specification and set data setting request with the A D converter module A616AD b Setting the number of channels and averaging processing specification with the A D converter module A68AD Corresponding remote VO station status signal PLS MO Write command PLS M1 MO M1 1 SET M10 M10 Initial setting program RTOP instruction i XneEF 7000070777777 RST M10 X n 1 D RST YnF n The operating status of the remote I O station can be checked using remote station erro
271. nternal relay M relay M relay M Coil Contact by the Coil Contact by the Coil Contact by the host host host station station station Coil ON OFF control of link relays B Contact Reads ON OFF data from the link relay B contact Usable range Fig 7 27 Link relay B assignment example b The empty area marked with 1 in the M L area for the first second half link parameters in Fig 7 27 cannot be used as a substitute for internal relays M in the master station and all local stations The device range that can be assigned with the second half link parameters is the range assigned with the first half link parameters final device number allocated with the first half link parameters 1 or later In Fig 7 27 since the range of BOOO to 37F is assigned to the first half link parameters B380 or later can be assigned to the second half link parameters Since local station No 2 is a MELSECNET mode compatible station the B400 to FFF range cannot be used ra area for the first half link parameter area for the second half link parameter DATA LINK SETTINGS n mmsem 3 Assignment of link registers W a Assignment for the master station and local stations M L area c d Assign 256 points for the master station M 256 points for local station No 2 L2 and 128 points for local station No 3 L3 with the first h
272. o 2 and local station No 3 Master station station stationNo 2 station No 2 Local stationNo 3 station No 3 este see _ as Used as Se as Internal internal internal relays M relays M relays M by the Contact by the by the host host host station station station ON OFF control of link relays B Contact Reads ON OFF data using link relay B contact Usable range Fig 7 17 Link relay B assignment example b The empty area marked with 1 in the M L area in Fig 7 17 cannot be used as a substitute for internal relays M in the master station and all local stations The M L area is the range BO to 27F from the minimum device number to the maximum device number assigned by the link parameters ra M R area DATA LINK SETTINGS mnr rn rn rr c F 2 Assignment of link registers W a Assignment for the master station and local stations M L area 256 points to the master station 128 points to local station No 2 and 196 points to local station No 3 are assigned Assignment for the remote I O stations M R area M R area Assign 16 points for the RTOP instruction and 16 points for the RFRP instruction in the user program of the master station as remote I O station No 1 No 1 requires 17 points 16 points for RTOP 1 point for OS for the M R area because one special function module is installed Assign 32 points for the RTOP instruction and 32 points f
273. o 3FF range assigned with link parameters for the second tier is used for the M R area b The area assigned to the master station for the third tier with the second half link parameters for the second tier is used for the second half link parameters for the third tier Link parameters tier Link param for the master station L1 m in L1 m 22 L1 m the third tier Usable as M R area as the area Usable as bom M L area for the second half link parameters for the first half link parameters for the second half link parameters Fig 7 40 Assignment when the MELSECNET II composite mode is used for the third tier When the MELSECNET mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode is selected as the operation mode for the third tier consider the following points when setting link parameters for the second tier 1 The device range assigned to the master station for the third tier is within the BO to 3FF range and the WO to 3FF range If the B400 to FFF range or W400 to FFF range is assigned to the master station the area cannot be used for the first half link parameters including the MELSECNET mode link parameter for the third tier 2 When an M R area is required for the third tier provide an empty area in the WO to 3FF range with the link parameters for the second tier MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS Applicabilty rr 7 10 4 Using the MELSECNET II composite m
274. o Section 5 3 7 and Chapter 7 Master Set the second tier link station parameters n lt 64 ESE MELSECNET VO station VO station Slave Slave Set the third tier link parameters MELSECNET B Third tier Local Local Local Local Local station station station station station No 1 No 4 No 3 No 2 No n Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave n s 31 4 COMPOSITION OF THREE TIER SYSTEM SE A 2 Restriction on use of link modules For the CPU module other than the ANUCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 and QCPU A Only one of the following link modules can be used with a CPU module When configuring the three tier system use a CPU module having a link function with any of the following link modules AJ71AP21 AJ71AP21 S3 Second tier Second tier 15 71 21 2 AJ71AR21 ATSJ71AR21 Lo PIT 21 AJ71AT21B A1SJ71AT21B Third tier Third tier For the CPU module any of the ANUCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 QCPU A Up to two of the following link modules one as a master station and the other as a local station can be used with a CPU module The two modules cannot be used only for master stations or local stations For local station AJ 1AP21 AJ 1AP21 S3 A1SJ71AP21 AJ 1AR21 A1SJ71AR21 Master or Local station Local
275. ode MELSECNET mode compatible data link modules A MELSECNET II mode compatible data link module can also be used as the master station for MELSECNET mode 6 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET mode compatible link modules c MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET mode compatible data modules 1 OVERVIEW es 2 Link modules that can be used as the local station Refer to Table 1 2 for the link module model name a 0 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET mode and MELSECNET II mode compatible data link modules MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET II mode compatible data link modules MELSECNET composite mode MELSECNET mode and MELSECNET II mode compatible data link modules Possibility of connecting remote stations a b c MELSECNET mode Possible to connect MELSECNET mode Impossible to connect MELSECNET composite mode Possible to connect Data link device range The following describes the data link device range for each operation mode The data link range for inputs X and outputs Y is determined by the data link module used as the master station The maximum value is indicated below For example if an A2NCPU or A2ACPU is used as the master station the X Y range that can be used for data link is 0 to 1FF 512 points a MELSECNET mode XIY 0 to 7FF 2048 points Oto 3FF 1024 points W 0Oto3FF 1024 points The data link range for link relays B and link
276. ode in the second tier The link relay B and link register W range which can be assigned to the third tier is described per operation mode used in the third tier Since the assignment of M L area for link relay B is the same as that of M L area for link register W the assignment of the link register W is only explained The link assignment range of input X and output Y is the same regardless of combinations of operation modes Refer to Section 7 10 1 5 1 MELSECNET mode used in the third tier a The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the first half link parameters for the second tier is used for the M L area for the third tier b The empty area within the WO to 3FF range assigned with link parameters for the second tier is used for the M R area for the third tier Link the second L1 m M R area Empty Empty er Link param E for the master the third tier pod Usable as the um area Usable as the area Fig 7 41 Assignment when the MELSECNET mode is used for the third tier 2 MELSECNET II mode used the third tier a The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the first half link parameters for the second tier is used for the first half link parameters for the third tier b The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the second half link parameters for the second tier is used for the second half link parameters for the third ti
277. of two or more words to the link registers employ the following procedure to prevent sending receiving the data in which the old and new data are mixed a When using a module that executes link refresh immediately after link scan such as the ANNCPUP21 R21 and the A0J2CPUP23 R23 executing handshake processing with link relays are recommended so that the link register data can be read by other stations after the data is written to the link registers Example 1 The following shows a program for sending WO and W1 data 1 to another station Send station Eo dena 80 For handshake At the sending station BO turns ON when data DO and D1 transferred to WO W1 b At the receiving station data are read while BO is ON 2 Link refresh is performed at the master station and local stations even while instruction is processed In a program example above if link refresh is performed when the DO data is being transmitted to WO the new data and old data is stored to WO and W1 respectively and sent to the receive station 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC A b Set link refresh disable area as shown below when using a module which can make rink refresh execution disable setting such as the ANNCPUP21 R21 by using ON OFF of M9053 and me DI EI instructions Example 1 The following shows a program for sending W0 and W1 da
278. on 0 42 Write program RTOP instruction 0 46 9 9 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 11010 28 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 22 Local station link monitor 10 6 Link Monitor by GPP 10 1 Master station link monitor 10 2 1013 Remote station link monitor eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeooeeeceecooccccceccocccccccccccccccecceeecece 1 10 2 Monitoring the Special Link Relays and Special Link Registers 1 13 10 3 Procedure for 5 08 00 99 6 000 0 0000000000000000000 6000000000000 000 00000000000 1 14 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 4 ERROR LED 000000000000000000000000000
279. on Displays the loop state of the data link system lt LOOP MONITOR MASTER gt lt CONDITION OF MASTER gt MODE ON LINE lt F R LOOP gt mode of the self OFF LINE LOOP TEST Displays the loop lt F LOOP gt OK F F line state of the self lt LOOP OK lt SCAN TIME gt R R _ n MAX 20 ms Displays the link MIN scan time PRESENT 20 ms SCANTIME Screen switches lt LOOP MONITOR MASTER gt CONDITION OF LOCAL LUREMOTE gt lt TOTAL 1 gt NO LS ABCD NO LS ABCD NO LS ABCD NO LS ABCD NO LS ABCD LS LINK CPU STAT H1 CH 0000 L OK L2 CR 0000 NG P MTR COMM CPU RUN CPU STOP PARAMETER STATION Displays the states of all slave stations o SCANTIME 10 2 10 TROUBLESHOOTING es l 1 Displaying host station operation mode M9224 M9227 a Displays operation status of the master station 1 ON LINE Master station mode setting is ON LINE with without automatic return function 2 OFF LINE Master station mode setting is OFF LINE SELF LOOPBACK TEST or STATION TO STATION TEST 3 LOOP TEST Master station mode setting is FORWARD LOOP TEST or REVERSE LOOP TEST 2 Displaying loop line status of the host station M9225 M9226 a Displays the forward loop line F loop and reverse loop line R loop status of the master station 1 OK Loop line is normal 2 NG Loop line is fa
280. on Initial communication start d The error detection program must be written before the initial communication detection program If initial communication detection program is written first the occurrence of errors and the execution of initial communication may not be detected When RFRP and RTOP instructions cannot be executed because the special function module is faulty X n 1 D is turned ON a b When YnD is turned ON X n 1 D is turned OFF If X n 1 D is turned ON a special function module might be faulty or the module might not be mounted correctly Check the special function module at which the error occurred Write the following timing circuit to turn YnD ON OFF with SET RST instruction a b Turn YnD ON when X n 1 D is turned ON Turn YnD OFF only once when X n 1 D is turned OFF MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 9 PROGRAMMING Applicability Oo Oo MELSEC A 9 8 2 Write program RTOP instruction The following shows the program where data is written to the special function module installed to remote station No 4 For system configuration and link parameter setting refer to Fig 9 9 and Fig 9 10 Program example 1 Executed only once when the start signal is turned ON PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE M9037 Detects
281. on is as follows Refer to Section 7 6 1 e Master station first half link parameters 1024 bytes or less Master station second half link parameters 1024 bytes or less e Local station first half link parameters 1024 bytes or less Local station second half link parameters 1024 bytes or less MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS Applicabilty rr 7 9 2 Remote system assignment When setting link parameters of a remote I O system consider the following points for assignment 1 Determine what number of master station the device number of I O module installed to the remote I O station is assigned The I O numbers that be assigned to a remote I O station is the I O numbers used for master station as I O of host station Refer to Section 7 6 4 2 When a special function module is installed to a remote station determine the link register W assignment range M R area to be used for reading writing buffer memory RFRP RTOP instruction The WO to 3FF range can be used for the M R area Refer to Section 7 6 3 a Divide the M R area into the M R area and the M R area to be assigned When connecting more than one remote station assign an M R area an M gt area to each remote I O station For example when connecting three remote stations divide the M R area and R area into three s
282. on mode used in the third tier Since the assignment of M L area for link relay B is the same as that of M L area for link register W the assignment of the link register W is only explained The link assignment range of input X and output Y is the same regardless of combinations of operation modes Refer to Section 7 10 1 5 1 MELSECNET mode used in the third tier a The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the link parameters for the second tier is used for the M L area for the third tier b The M R area and the empty area of the second tier is used for the M R area of the third tier Link parameters for the second tier L1 m M R area Empty Link parameters for the master station L1 m for the third L1 m tier Linen as the M L area Usable as the area Fig 7 35 Assignment when the MELSECNET mode is used for the third tier 2 MELSECNET mode used in the third tier a The range assigned to the master station for the third tier with the link parameters for the second tier is used for the first half link parameters for the third tier b The empty area that begins after the M L area assigned with the link parameters for the second tier and the M R area are used for the second half link parameters for the third tier 3FF Link parameters for the master station Lt m for the third tier Li m L1 m i M as the M L area for Usable as the M L area for the first half link paramet
283. ons in the loop Stores the accumulated number of times that the following errors are detected in the loop line currently being used CRC OVER AB IF Errors are counted up to FFFFx and then counting is stopped Execute the reset operation to clear the data to O Stores station numbers of the local stations excluding the host station whose status is either STOP or PAUSE DEVICE Bit pro ws os oz os es ba vs sa e o 09250 148 147 146 145 144 42 141 L o 539 138 1 37 Lae as 134 133 09251 64163 562 561 rsa 58 57 156 555 154 Lsa Lsa 151 Lsc Lao If a local station except for the host station goes down data before the failure will be held When the corresponding bit in D9252 to D9255 is O the relevant bit in the above special registers is validated Even If the host station master station goes down the data before the failure will be also held When the status of a local station is either STOP or PAUSE the corresponding bit is set to 1 When the status of the local station changes to RUN or STEP RUN the bit is automatically reset to O The bit status of remote station always remains O Example When the statuses of local stations No 7 and No 15 are either STOP or PAUSE 1 is set to bit 6 and bit 14 of D9248 When 09248 is monitored its value is 16448 4040 The bit corresponding to the host station is not
284. or the RFRP instruction in the user program of the master station for the remote station No 4 For No 4 34 points 32 points for RTOP 2 points for OS are required for the M R area because two special function modules are installed Master station M PEE station Sig a ju E station Used as Used as Used as c a data Read a data a data ea Write by from Write by register en the master Read Write 127 master the master D by the D by the tati 5 station host Hod station Station station station Read Reading word data Write Writing word data Usable range Fig 7 18 Link register W assignment example The empty area marked with 1 in the M L area in Fig 7 18 cannot be used as a substitute for data register D in the master station and all local stations In addition empty area of M R area marked with 2 cannot be used as a data register D by the master station 7 39 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 3 Assignment of inputs outputs Y a Input and output range used for data link by the master station The master station uses the X YO to X Y14F range as of host station For the data link the X Y150 to X Y7FF range can be used b Assignment of remote I O stations 1 Assignment of remote I O station No 1 Inputs X to 8F Outputs Y Y30 to 10F 2 Assignment of remote I O station No 4 Inputs X to BF Outputs Y Y80 to 1
285. orrectly Reset the data link system Does the data link start Are the link parameters set to master station Set the link parameters to master station Does the data link start Are the master station s switches set as shown below Mode select switch ONLINE 0 1 Station number setting switch 0 Correct the setting and reset Does the data link start monitoring time setting with the link parameters greater than the link scan time Correct the monitoring time setting Monitor D9207 to D9209 to YES check link scan time NO Does the data link start o 2 COMPLETE 10 15 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A Use the self loopback test to check the master station No 1 and the final station Are any of the stations faulty YES Replace the link module for the faulty station Does the data link start Use the station to station test to check YES the loop line Replace the link cable at the faulty position COMPLETE 1 In the MELSECNET data link if the power supply of the local or remote station on both sides of a normally operating local or remote station is turned off simultaneously within 100 ms the data link for the entire system might be disabled If the automatic return function is set for these stations data communication resumes immediately However i
286. otal number of local stations Number of local stations allocated to second half link parameters ms In the MELSECNET II composite mode LS K x Total number of remote i O stations Total number of local stations Number of local stations allocated to second half link parameters ms 4 Find K KL and KR in the calculation expression from the following Total ber of sl 9to16 17 to 24 25 to 32 331040 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64 stations as fas eo ss oo ee 5 Calculate the total number of link points bytes and use the following graph to obtain the KB value in the calculation expression Wx 16 8192 B Total points for link relays B that are used on all stations W Total points for link registers W that are used on all stations Xo Total points for link inputs X that are assigned to master station Yo Total points for link outputs Y that are assigned to master station Total number of link points ms a When the first and latter halves of link parameters are set b When only the first half of link parameters is set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Kbyte Total link points 6 17 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING ed AND PROCESSING TIME FUN ee UT MELSEC A When a MELSECNET B data link system is used 1 In the
287. parameter is set or the data is correct M9206 Checks consistency whether the B W assignment range overlaps between the link parameters set on a slave station master station for the third tier and those set for the host station M9207 c Number of communication error occurrences he accumulated number of retries due to transmission errors D9210 accumulated number of receive error occurrences 09240 d Link card hardware error M9210 e Mode setting switch setting status in the link card Whether the mode setting switch is set for online 0 or 1 or offline test mode 2 to 7 M9224 f Data link status Forward loop error M9225 Reverse loop error M9226 Stores information whether data is sent via the forward loop reverse loop or forward reverse loop D9204 e Stores the stations where loopback occurs 09205 09206 e Stores information at which points errors occur in the forward loop line and reverse loop line D9232 to D9239 5 SPECIFICATIONS n mms 2 Events checked by local stations a Data communication status with the master station Checks if cyclic communication is executed normally M9246 Checks if cyclic communication is executed normally from the master station for the second tier when the host station is a local station for the third tier M9247 Checks if the link parameters are received from the master station
288. pecial relays ON or OFF during control 5 SPECIFICATIONS es Expanded link relay and link register W range The device range that is not assigned to the link parameters for the second tier can be assigned to the link parameters for the third tier third tier 1 third tier 2 third tier n For this assignment the same range can be assigned to different data link For example when 512 points of B WO to 1FF are used for the second tier as illustrated in Fig 5 8 the device range of B W200 to 3FF can be redundantly assigned to the third tier 1 link and also to the third tier 2 link System configuration Turn ON M9208 and M9209 Indicates the station set for expanded use of B W Link parameter assignment B WO 80 3FF Link parameter setting of the master station L1 m L2 m L3 m Empty M for the second tier Device range that can be used by the link parameters for the third tier over lapping is possible B WO 200 300 380 3FF Link parameter setting L1 m for third tier 1 B WO 200 280 380 3FF Link parameter setting L2 m for third tier 2 Fig 5 8 Expanded use example of link relay B and link register W Since the L3 m station has not been set for expanded use of B W its communication range is as described in Section 5 3 1 5 SPECIFICATIONS es 3 Data communication range with expanded link relays and link registers W a Link relays B and lin
289. perating a sequence program from step O to the next step O It can be checked by monitoring ladder or special registers D9017 to D9019 with a peripheral device REMARK 1 Refer to Section 9 3 1 for details of the data link special registers 2 Refer to the Type ACPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Common Instructions for details of the special registers D9017 to D9019 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite mode mode MELSECNET II Operating Mode MELSECNET mode mode 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING __ ue AND PROCESSING TIME sea CU MELSEC A 6 2 1 Transmission delay time in a two tier system This section shows the maximum transmission delay times of a data link in a link data system 1 The following table shows the transmission delay times when the CPU of the type that immediately makes a link refresh after link scan is used Table 6 2 Maximum transmission delay time L lt LS lt M LS lt L lt M LS lt lt 5 1 Link relay Link register W Output Y Master station to local LADP executed LRDP or LWTP instruction Local station Link relay B Link register W Input X to master station Local station Link relay B Link register W to local station 1 1 Output Y Master station to remote I O station RFRP instruction e
290. points for the empty area of link register W is required for the assignment of the M R area for the third tier with the first half link parameters for the second tier In the system configuration shown in Fig 7 44 since M R area for the second tier also has 132 points this range can also be used for assignment 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 3 Assignment of link relays B EN station M ELM as internal relays M in the master station 000 M L area allo cated with B1 00 ARRAERAARAEERTRAEETABAWRAZTRRETSTWEASAESAAREERRERAASAERAARRRRERERR first half link I aaan parameters B180 B300 ld Phe ke laeua 4 86858866 B400 veassbanesassenaecectase nenvonsethsasesct b t b nsoesrh tostbbaac esarsbhibububsana B500 area allo cated with h if B600 ST TTT TT ee Ce CTT TTT eT eC eee Te eT ME a parameters um FB Empty area FFF Fig 7 45 Link relays B assignment example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A Link using local station No 3 L3 m as the master station for the third tier Master station L3 m Local station No 1 71 Local station No 3 73 Used as Used as Used as Used as internal internal internal internal Coil Contact relays Coil Contact relays n Coil Contact relays Contact WM in the in the
291. ponding station executing data link processing As the station designated with the instruction a remote I O station is connected Or the local station for the QCPU specified by the LRDP instruction is in STOP status Stores the execution result of an LRDP word device read instruction M9201 ON 0 Normal LRDP instruction setting LRDP execution a 09200 Corresponding station result error LRDP be executed in the corresponding station 0 Normal LWTP instruction setting fault D9201 LWTP execution Corresponding station result error LWTP cannot be executed in the corresponding station LRDP instruction setting TUNG err Faulty setting of the LRDP D9202 Local station link type D9203 instruction constant source and or D9204 Stores the execution result of an LWTP word device write instruction M9203 ON LWTP instruction setting TUE C Faulty setting of the LWTP instruction constant source and or target Corresponding station error The designated station is not executing data link processing LWTP cannot be executed the corresponding station As the station designated with the LWTP instruction a remote I O station is connected Or the local station for the QCPU specified by the LWTP instruction is in STOP status Stores whether a slave station is compatible with the MELSECNET mode or MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET II compatible station 1
292. put modules as shown below If the installation of I O modules is changed from a to b a reduction of 16 input assignment points and 32 output assignment points can be achieved Output module 16 im points points points points Output module 16 points X2F X4F Assigned input points Assigned output points REMARK When all of the local stations are MELSECNET mode compatible data link module the master station and all of the local stations can be assigned with the second half link parameters which can simplify handshake processing mentioned in Section 9 1 4 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS Applicabilty rr 7 9 4 Link parameter setting example The following describes the link parameter setting system configuration shown in Fig 7 26 using the MELSECNET II composite mode iu station Remote station Local station Local station Remote station No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Xo X20 Y30 Y70 X70 zu ols CPU AP B wie R21 XC pe Input module Output module Special function module Fig 7 26 Local remote system configuration example 1 Number of assigned points a Master station is the MELSECNET II mode compatible station Link relays B 256 points and link registers W 256 points are assigned with the first half link parameters to communicate with local station No 2
293. r XE XBF Y8F XIF X9F 2 4 v7r Y9F Y9F YBO Y130 YAO Y120 Y150 X110 Y13F YAF 2 Y16F X12F Yi40 190 200 Y15F Y19F 17 Y20F Y14F 1 Y13F Y1AF Input module Output module Special function module O Fig 9 1 System configuration 9 26 9 Link device assignment SLAVE STATIONS 060 18F 0 0 15 100 186 250 294 340 3 1 10ms 700 7FF 390 47F 260 36F 580 6AF e W gt W Y Y DX 1X lt 030 12F 250 33F 1B0 28F 080 1AF 6D0 76F 1A0 25F 2A0 3BF 500 5BF lt lt gt 000 15 000 186 200 294 300 3 1 260 47F 580 7FF 1A0 3BF 500 76F MELSEC A 000 09 210 2 300 41F 000 MASTER L LOCAL REMOTE REMOTE Fig 9 2 Link device assignment 9 27 9 PROGRAMMING mnn rn rm cr Program example 1 Data link between the master station and a local station Master station program Turn Y260 X1B0 of local station No 3 ON while the T4 contact is OFF and turn Y 390 X250 of local station No 2 ON while the T4 contact is ON Turn YCO ON while X1A0 Y210 of local station No 2 is ON and turn YC1 ON while X2A0 Y300 of local station No 3 is ON Turns ON OFF the T4 contact every 2 seconds It stops when both X1A0 and X2A0 turn ON Tu
294. r 09228 to D9231 of special link registers To use the remote station error in a program develop it in bit devices M L etc using the MOV instruction Example MOV D9228 K4M1000 and the contents of 09228 are developed in M1000 to M1015 9 3 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 9 P ROG RAM M N G Applicability rr 9 2 Special Link Relays Special link relays are internal relays controlled by turning ON OFF due to various causes during data link Monitoring or using them in a sequence program can check data link errors 9 2 1 Special link relays enabled only for the master station Table 9 1 and Table 9 2 show the special relays controlled only when the host station is set to the master station Table 9 1 MELSECNET special link relays list Device Data Description Number Turned ON when LRDP word device read instruction is received Used in a user program as an interlock for an LRDP instruction LRDP instruction OFF Unreceived 9200 Remains ON after the completion of word device read processing called by received ON Received an LRDP instruction Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program Turned ON after an LRDP word device read instruction has been executed The execution results are stored in D9200 M9201 LRDP instruction
295. r a remote system For the link parameter setting of a remote station consider the following points for the assignment 1 Determine what number of master station the device number of I O module installed to the remote station is assigned The I O numbers that be assigned to a remote I O station is the I O numbers used for master station as I O of host station Refer to Section 7 6 4 2 When a special function module is installed to a remote station determine the link register W assignment range M R area to be used for reading writing buffer memory RFRP RTOP instruction Refer to Section 7 6 4 3 Make sure that the number of link points per station is as follows Refer to Section 7 6 1 e Remote station 012 bytes Inputs and outputs are less than 512 points of X YO to 1FF 1 If the M R area used by the system is used incorrectly in a user program data cannot be read written correctly when the RFRP RTOP instruction is executed 2 The number of link points be reduced by mounting modules to a remote 1 O station in groups of input modules special function modules and output modules as shown below If the installation of modules is changed from a to b a reduction of 16 input assignment points and 32 output assignment points can be achieved Input Input Output Input Output AJ72 module module f Pction module module
296. r cables a Up to 64 local and remote I O stations can be connected to a master station for the second tier b For the third tier up to 31 local and remote stations can be connected to the master station which is the local station for the second tier 4 2 1 System configuration Fig 4 3 shows the configuration of the three tier system Master station No n E 6 Slave 4 Op tical fiber cable Coaxial cable p 9 9 MELSECNET No 4 Second tier 1 emote emote station No 3 HO station Slave Intermediate station Slave Shielded twisted pair cable MELSECNET B Local Local Remote Local Local station station station station station No 1 No 4 No 3 No 2 No n Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave Sub slave 5 31 Fig 4 3 Three tier system when the second tier is MELSECNET data link system 1 Remote I O stations cannot be connected if the MELSECNET II mode is used 2 MELSECNET B data link system has no restriction on the order of stations including master stations 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM es 4 2 2 Precautions when using data link This section explains precautions for configuring a three tier system 1 Setting link parameters In the three tier system setting link parameters to CPU modules for the master stations in the second and third tiers is required For link parameter setting refer t
297. r station sequence program to the output module installed in the remote station M Receives ON OFF data from an input module installed in the remote 1 O station Outputs the operation results obtained by the master station M sequence program 2 For communication between the master and remote stations the number of I O points of the remote station must be assigned to the I O number used on the master station by link parameters of the master station beforehand a When the input module in the remote I O station is turned ON the input X of the master station assigned by the link parameter is also turned ON b When the output Y assigned with the link parameter of the master station is turned ON the output module on the remote station turns ON The following will result if you assign Inputs X100 to X17F in master station to inputs to X7F in remote station and Outputs Y180 to Y1FF in master station to outputs 80 to YFF in remote I O station Master station f Remote I O station Input module When the input modules to X7F in the remote station are turned ON OFF the corresponding devices X100 to X17F in the master station are turned ON OFF accordingly When devices Y180 to Y1FF in the master station are turned ON OFF the corresponding output modules Y80 to YFF in the remote module are turned ON OFF accordingly 5 SPECIFICATIONS n
298. r the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product Fully insert the protection on the bottom of the module into the hole in the base unit and press the module into position To fix an AnS series module to the base unit tighten the screws within the specified torque range Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions N WARNING Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system when installing or placing wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product N CAUTION Correctly solder coaxial cable connectors Incomplete soldering may result in malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the ca
299. rameter only its function is the same as that of the MELSECNET mode First half link parameters should be assigned to master stations local stations and remote stations e Second half link parameters should be assigned to master and local stations that are compatible with MELSECNET II mode only oecond half link parameters cannot be assigned to remote stations or MELSECNET mode compatible local stations 2 Maximum link points per station For stations with only first half link parameters set Master station and local station 1024 bytes station Remote station 512 bytes station I O is 512 points of to per station For stations with both first and second link parameters set Master station and local station 2048 bytes station The information mentioned above 1 to 5 is summarized in Table 1 2 1 OVERVIEW es Table 1 2 MELSECNET II Data Link Function Overview Operation mode MELSECNET data link system Item MELSECNET mode 2 21 21 AnNCPUP21 R21 AnNCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 S4 AnACPUP21 R21 AnACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUP21 S4 AnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnUCPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 QnACPU AJ71AP21 S3 R21 AnSCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 AnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QnASCPU A1SJ71AP21 R21 QCPU A A1SJ71AP21 R21 A80BD A2USH S1 A1SJ71AP21 R21 A2CCPUP21 R21 Data link modules that can be used as a master station A0J2HCPUP21 R21 AnNCPUP21 R21 AnNCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 S4 Computer A70BD J7
300. range assigned with the first half link parameters can be read by the master station and all local stations However the range assigned with the second half link parameters can only be read by MELSECNET II mode compatible stations Examine the assignment range according to the station with which data communication will be executed b The setting range of the first half link parameters is BO to 3FF and WO to 3FF c The device range that can be assigned with the second half link parameters is the range assigned with the first half link parameters final device number 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B100 or later can be assigned to the second half parameters If O point is assigned with the first half link parameters assignment with the second half link parameters can be started with B WO Link relay link register B WO Allocated to first Can be read by master station half link parameters and all local stations n 3FF B Wn B Wn 1 Allocated to second be read by MELSECNET Il half link parameters compatible station only B AWFFF 2 If the number of link relay B points is insufficient examine to substitute inputs X and outputs Y for data communicated between the master station and a local station one to one Refer to Section 7 6 4 7 48 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es F 3 Make sure that the number of link points per stati
301. remote station is communicating Local station or Not M the initial setting data link parameter to the master station to execute data remote I O station communi link ink processing M9236 initial cating P J iM Automatically turned OFF when the communication for initial data setting communication Communi has been completed That is M9236 is turned OFF when bits 09224 to status catin D9227 are all OFF e Turned ON when an error occurs with one local station or remote I O station within the loop Local station or The relay is turned ON while a station to station test is being executed for M9237 remote I O station Error a local station or a remote I O station and the data link is operating error Automatically turned OFF when the faulty station returns to the normal status or the data link returns to the normal status by switching the loop line That is M9237 is turned OFF when bits D9228 to D9231 are all OFF Local station or Turned ON when an error occurs in the forward loop line or reverse loop remote station Normal 9238 line of the local stations and remote stations That is M9238 is turned forward reverse Error OFF when bits 09232 to 09239 are all OFF loop error 9 Device Number M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 M9206 M9207 M9208 M9209 M9210 M9224 Name LRDP instruction received LRDP instructio
302. removed Enabled Reset the disconnected station and the local and remote I O stations Disabled that do not have the automatic return function Enabled Reset the disconnected station and the local and remote stations Disabled that do not have the automatic return function and then reset the Disabled master station Enabled Automatic return function selected Disabled Automatic return function not selected 5 SPECIFICATIONS 5 3 4 Loopback function 1 2 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET I composite mode mode composite mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode mode Aplicabiliy Loopback function The MELSECNET data link system has a double configuration of link cables optical fiber or coaxial The loopback function uses the double configuration to isolate the faulty part and maintain the data link with the normally operating stations when a cable is broken or a local station or remote station is disconnected 1 In the MELSECNET data link system the station number of slave stations and sub slave stations should be set in order from the station No 1 to the station No the forward loop direction for the loopback function For details refer to Section 8 2 The loopback function may not work depending on the fault of the data link module Identify the faulty data link module in the
303. rite by Read from Write by Read Write byme the master the master the master the master host station station station station station 9 8 T t Read Read word data Write word data O Usable range Fig 7 13 Link register W assignment example b In Fig 7 13 the empty area marked with 1 in the M R area cannot be used as a data register D by the master station 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 3 Assignment of inputs X outputs Y a Input and output range used for data link by master station The master station uses the X YO to X Y14F range as I O of host station The X Y150 to 7FF range can be used for the data link b Assignment of remote stations 1 Assignment of remote station No 1 Inputs X XO to 8F Outputs Y Y30 to 10F 2 Assignment of remote station No 2 Inputs X XO to BF Outputs Y Y80 to 19F Remote station Remote station Master station No 1 Xoo 2 Ei 1 points x 2 used by the Xoer host station Link input The range in the shaded area can ve used for internal memory Fig 7 14 Inputs X and outputs Y assignment example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 4 Link parameter setting When the assignment of 1 to 3 is executed set the link parameters as shown in the figure below LINK SLAVE ALL L D T INTER PC MITTENT STATIONS 10ms 300
304. rnal conductor 5 6mm 0 22inch 3 8mm 0 15inch Single annealed copper wire mesh diameter Single annealed copper wire mesh Connector plug for 5C 2V BNC P 5 or BNC P 5DV SA 01 is recommended Applicable Connector plug for 3C 2V connector plug BNC P 3 Ni is recommended REMARK Consult nearest Mitsubishi representative with connector plug MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNETII MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode SPECIFICATIONS co o MELSEC A 5 5 5 2 Connector for the coaxial cable The following explains the structure and connecting procedures of the BNC connector connector plug for the coaxial cable 1 Structure of the BNC connector and the coaxial cable Fig 5 11 shows the structure of the BNC connector and the coaxial cable Parts of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable SD e External conductor ow Nut Washer Outer sheath Insulation material Plug shell e Clamp Contact Internal conductor Fig 5 11 Structure of the BNC connector and the coaxial cable 2 Procedure for connecting the BNC connector and the coaxial cable The following describes the procedure for connecting the BNC connector and the coaxial cable a Remove the outer sheath of the coaxial cable to specified dimensions as shown below Use caution not to damage the ex
305. rns Y390 ON while the T4 contact is ON Turns Y260 ON while the T4 contact is OFF Turns YCO ON while X1A0 is ON Turns YC1 ON while X2A0 is ON Local station No 2 program Turn Y1E0 ON while X250 Y390 of the master station is ON Turn Y210 X1A0 of the master station ON when X250 is ON for 20 times Counts 20 times that X250 turns from OFF to ON with C10 Turns Y1EO ON while X250 is ON T11 times out 5 seconds after C10 counts up Turns Y210 ON after C11 counts up Hesets C10 when T11 times out Local station No 3 program Turn 80 ON while X1BO Y260 of the master station is ON Turn Y300 X2A0 of the master station ON when X1BO is turned ON for 20 times X1BO K20 Counts 20 times that X1B0 turns from OFF to ON with C20 Turns Y80 ON while X1B0 is ON T21 times out 5 seconds after C20 counts up Turns Y300 ON when C20 counts up Resets C20 when T21 times out 9 PROGRAMMING mm sunny Program example No 2 Data link between the master station and a remote station Master station program When X6D0 of master station of remote I O station No 1 is turned ON Y 120 Y7FO of the master station of remote station No 1 and Y170 Y670 of the master station of remote station No 4 flash every 1 second In addition flashing stops when XO X500 of the master station of remote station No 4 is turned ON X6D0 Stores when X6DO XO of rem station 1 is turn
306. s W REMARK The device range that can be assigned to the second half link parameters is the range assigned to the first half link parameters final device number 1 Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B100 or later can be assigned to the second half parameters If O point is assigned to the first half link parameters assignment of the second half link parameters can be started with B WO 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A Link parameter setting screen The following shows link parameter setting screens a First half link parameters B1 000 37F MELSECNET Il MULTI MODE LINK 22 800 8FF 800 AFF 300 341 360 39F 680 77F 230 59F 600 77F 200 4BF SLAVE STATIONS 10ms gt L lt L R ee R H L R L R 100 1FF 280 37F 100 1FF 240 28F 230 30F 680 6FF 700 77F 480 59F 030 10F 200 27F 200 27F 080 19F 200 28F 600 67F 700 77F 400 48F 000 08F 280 2FF 200 27F 000 0BF MASTER L LOCAL PRESS SSN TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RENGE OF B W REMOTE LOCAL REMOTE MELSECNET LOCAL b Second half link parameters MELSECNET li MULTI MODE SECOND B1 W1 B2 800 AFF M ALLL INTER W2 800 AFF MITTENT 10 5 SLAVE PC STATIONS SECOND MeL w _ M MASTER L PRESS lt SSN gt
307. s about the differences among these modes owitching the communication speed is enabled The communication speed can be set to 125kbps 250kbps 500kbps or 1Mbps The total link distance can be changed by switching the communication speed For the relationship between the communication speed and total link distance refer to Table 1 1 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM mr r r nrrn r 3 2 MELSECNET B Data Link System 3 2 1 Overall configuration 1 Two tier system The two tier system is a system to connect up to 31 local stations and remote stations to a master station via shielded twisted pair cables In a two tier system a master station is referred to as master station and a local station or a remote station is referred to as slave station 2 System configuration Fig 3 3 shows the configuration of the two tier system Master station Shielded twisted pair cable Remote 1 0 Local Remote 1 0 station station station No 1 Slave No 3 Slave No 2 Slave No n Slave 31 Fig 3 3 Two tier system 1 Remote I O stations cannot be connected if the MELSECNET II mode is used 2 The connection order or station order of master stations local stations and remote I O stations can be freely decided in the MELSECNET B data link system 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM n 9 3 2
308. s depending on the communication speed 125kbps 1200m 250kbps 600m 500kbps 400m 1Mbps 200m Up to 10km 32810ft Between stations 500m 1640 5ft Up to 65 stations loop Up to 32 stations loop 1 master station 64 local remote stations 1 master station 31 local remote stations CMI NRZI method Conforms to HDLC frame method Retry by CRC generating polynomial XU X 22 XS 1 and timeout The loopback function activated by detection of an error or cable disconnection The diagnostic functions such as link line check of the host station The diagnostic functions such as link line check of the host station Coaxial cable Shielded twisted pair cable 2 The A1SHCPU A1SJHCPU A2SHCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU S1 A2UCPU S1 A4UCPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A QO6HCPU A can use up to 2048 points 5 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A 5 3 Functions The following shows the functions of the data link system Table 5 2 List of data link system functions Description MELSECNET data link system 1 Function to periodically communicate data between the master station and the slave stations local Item station and remote I O station 2 The cyclic transmission function includes the following two communications One to one communication between the master station and a slave station Communication between the
309. s for wiring 8 1 Preparatory Steps before Operation This section describes a procedure for data link START Checks before turning on the power supply Check the input power supply voltage Check the voltage to be supplied to I O devices Set the RUN STOP key switch on the CPU module to STOP Turning ON power supply Refer to Section 8 6 Turn ON the power supply to the link module Check that the POWER LED is on Checking the link module Refer to Section 8 7 1 Use the self loopback test to check the link module hardware Connecting the link cables Connect link modules with link cables Checking the inter station line Refer to Section 8 7 2 Check the lines between the two adjacent stations Setting the link parameters Set the link parameters to the link module in the master station Checking the Forward reverse loop Refer to Section 8 7 3 Use the forward loop test and reverse loop test to execute the line check for every link cable Write a program used for data link and check it Programming and debugging Be sure to set all of the stations off line before checking the program MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION rr 8 2 Setting the Link Module Station Numbers This section describes the station number setting for link modules and precautions for it 8 2 1 Setting the link module
310. s line connection between two stations by setting the lower numbered station as the testing station and another station Station to station test Tested station Checks the hardware of each link module including Self loopback test T the transmission and receive circuits O Executable x Not executable as the tested station 8 7 1 Self loopback test 1 Self loopback test a The self loopback test checks the hardware of each link module including the transmission and receiving circuits in transmission system 1 In the MELSECNET data link system connect the send and receive ends on the host station with an optical fiber cable or coaxial cables as shown in Fig 8 13 2 In the MELSECNET B data link system perform this test to a single link module Connecting SDA RDA and SDB RDB are not required b When the receive end cannot receive data sent from the send end in a given time the loop is determined to be faulty For optical fiber cable Forward loop data flow For coaxial cables OUT IN R RDF SU F HD 50 T Lk gt Coaxial cable Forward loop data flow Reverse loop data flow Fig 8 13 Self loopback test 8 17 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION es 2 Test procedure The following flowchart shows the operation procedure for self loopback test START YES NO Connect the optical fiber cables or coaxial cables as shown in Fig 8 13 When performing the self loopba
311. s the QCPU local station as a faulty station relevant bit D9228 to D9231 is turned ON However the test is normally conducted LRDP instruction receive request Buffer memory address ACH LWTP instruction receive request Buffer memory address AEH The system handles the received instruction The program for receiving LRDP LWTP instruction is not required Not particularly restricted The master station can access A QnACPU local stations A QnACPU local stations can access the master station Can use the network diagnostics of GX Developer Place the A QnACPU local station into STOP status to conduct the test LRDP instruction completion M9204 LWTP instruction completion M9205 Hardware failure RUN LED OFF Link card failure M9211 Link status XO Link status M9240 1 When replacing with a QCPU local station the following alternative solution can be applied to GOT communications Table 1 4 Alternative solution for GOT communications Before replacement Alternative solution GOT is connected to master station to access A QnACPU local station is connected to A QnACPU local station to access master station 1 12 Send receive the link data of the devices that are used for access from the GOT Change the setting so that the GOT can access the devices refreshed on the host station f the number of link points is insufficient install another local module
312. se AJT1AT21B ait A2UCPU S1 AJ71AT21B A3UCPU AJ71AT21B A4UCPU AJ71AT21B 72 2 2 AJ71AT21B Q2ACPU O O O AJ71AT21B Q2ACPU S1 AJ71AT21B Q3ACPU AJ71A 21B Q4ACPU AJ71AT21B 54 Applicable when the A1SJ71AT21B is used 2 MELSECNET MELSECNET II or MELSECNET II composite modes can be used for the second tier MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode composite mode 5 SPECIFICATIONS ep s MELSEC A o SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the general specifications of the data link system and the performance specifications and functions of the link modules 5 1 General Specifications For general specifications refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used 5 SPECIFICATIONS 5 2 Performance Specifications MELSEC A The following shows the performance specifications of the data link system Table 5 1 Performance specifications Item Output Y Max number of link points used per station Max number of link points per system Max number of link points per station station Overall cable distance 1 Number of connectable stations Modulation method Error control system RAS functions REMARK 1 Overall distances e MELSECNET e MELSECNET B MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode Up to the maximum I O points allowed for master s
313. se loop cable disconnection or incomplete cable connection 10 25 10 TROUBLESHOOTING es 10 5 Replacing a Faulty Station of Link Module This section explains how to replace the link module of a faulty station in data link system When a MELSECNET data link system is used oince the link cables are doubled in a MELSECNET data link system the loopback function can continue data link operations even if power supply to one station local or remote station is turned OFF Replace the link module of a faulty station as shown below START Turn OFF the power to the faulty station Remove the link cables Refer to Section 8 4 disconnecting the cable it is ind to attach a tag for future reference Remove the link module from the base unit ea Refer to the User s Manual for the CPU module Set the same station No and operation mode etc as those of the replaced link module for the new one Install a new link module in the e Refer to the User s Manual for the CPU module Connect the link cables Turn ON the power Resume data link operations COMPLETE Refer to Section 8 4 10 26 10 TROUBLESHOOTING n umma When MELSECNET B data link system is used In a MELSECNET B data link system since the link cables for both send and receive operations are connected to the same terminal
314. second half link parameters for each MELSECNET II mode compatible station The device range assigned with the first half link parameters can be read by the master station and all local stations However the range assigned with the second half link parameters can only be read by MELSECNET II mode compatible stations Determine the assignment range according to the station with which data communication will be executed b The setting range of the first half link parameters is BO to 3FF c The device range that can be assigned with the second half link parameters is the range assigned with the first half link parameters final device number 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B100 or later can be assigned to the second half parameters If O point is assigned with the first half link parameters assignment with the second half link parameters can be started with BO When special function module is installed to a remote station Link registers W are required for reading writing buffer memory RFRP RTOP instruction Divide the link registers W in the WO to 3FF range to be assigned with the first half link parameters into the M L area for communication between the master station and a local station and the M R area for communication between the master station and a remote station and assign them Link register assignment For the M L area of link registers W
315. sed for the second tier 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 1 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued Module Model O Available MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Remarks MELSECNET MELSECNET II composite composite mode mode mode mode D CEP A2ASCPU A1SJ71AP21 A2ASCPU A1SJ71AR21 A2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 A2ASCPU S1 A1SJ71AR21 A2USHCPU S1 A1SJ71AP21 A2USHCPU S1 A4SJ71AP2 A1SJ71AR21 1 Q02CPU A A1SJ71AR2 A1SJ71AP21 1 Q02CPU A A1SJ71AR21 QO2HCPU A CPU A1SJ71AP21 module QO2HCPU A Use the station A1SJ71AR21 9 2 2 number setting link switch to set the o O O selection of master or local station two T QO6HCPU A A1SJ71AR21 A2UCPU AJ71AP21 S3 A2UCPU AJ71AR21 A2UCPU S1 AJ71AP21 S3 A2UCPU S1 AJ71AP21 AJ71AR21 AJ71AP21 A3UCPU S3 AJ71AP21 S3 AJ 1AR21 A3UCPU AJ71AR21 A4UCPU AJ71AP21 S3 A4UCPU AJ71AR21 2 MELSECNET MELSECNET or MELSECNET composite modes can be used for the second tier 4 COMPOSITION OF THREE TIER SYSTEM mms F 42 Data Link System when the Second Tier is MELSECNET and the Third Tier is MELSECNET B In the system that the second tier isa MELSECNET data link system and the third tier is a MELSECNET B data link system the second tier is connected with optical fiber cables or coaxial cables and the third tier is connected with shielded twisted pai
316. set to 1 regardless of the status of the station itself Always O is stored Stores station Nos of faulty local stations except for the host station in the loop into the corresponding bits in the special registers for link as shown below Only a faulty local station can be detected by another local station The bit status of remote station always remains O DEVICE Bit LL fots eta eta et ors eto be be o ws ws es oe feo D9252 116 ftis a t13 12 eio us 17 te s us fts 2 i De253 132 131 L30 Le9 128 27 126 126 124 123 122 L21 20 1019 118 117 D9254 148 147 146 145 44 143 142 540 039 137 136 135 134 133 29255 164 163 162 161 Leo 89 se 157 556 585 154 583 152 151 550 Lag Bits corresponding to the station Nos of faulty local stations except for host station turn to 1 Example When local station No 12 is faulty 1 is set to bit 11 of D9252 When 09252 is monitored its value is 2048 500 When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operating status the bit is automatically reset to O 9 MELSEC A Table 9 8 List of MELSECNET B special link registers Device Name Data Description Number Station number M Stores station number Stores the station number assigned to the host station itself
317. signment of link relays B Local station Local PM NI 2 Local station No 3 station No 1 11 L3 Used as Used as Used as Used as internal relays internal Es internal relavs i internal relays Coil Contact M by the Contact M by the M by the y Contact M by the host station host station host station host station ON OFF control of link relays B Contact Reads ON OFF data from the link relay B contact O Usable range Fig 7 21 Link relay B assignment example The empty area marked with 1 in the M L area for the first half link parameters in Fig 7 21 assigned cannot be used as a substitute for internal relays M in the master station and all local stations This is also true for any empty area in the M L area assigned with the second half link parameters The range that can be assigned with second half link parameters is the range assigned with the first half link parameters final device number 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B 100 or later can be assigned to the second half parameters In Fig 7 21 since the range of B000 to 8FF is assigned to the first half link parameters B900 or later can be assigned to the second hall link parameter 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 4 Assignment of link registers W Master station M E E E E FE No 2 Local No 3 Used as Used as EM as em as a data a data a data a
318. slave station numbers can be set in descending order as the figure below Master station Slave station Slave station Slave station No 1 No 2 No 3 Station Station No 03 No 02 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION es l Precautions for setting the link module station numbers The following shows the precautions for station number setting 1 Station numbers have to be consecutive If station numbers are not set consecutively the stations with incorrect station numbers are treated as communication faulty stations Cannot set No 1 Station Station No 01 No 02 No 1 No 2 Station Station Station 01 02 04 2 station numbers the same loop have to be all different If the same station number is assigned to another station in the same loop since the stations with the same station number send data simultaneously communications are failed Master station Data cannot be correctly sent from No 3 to other stations because both No 3 and 3 B send data simultaneously 3 When the number of slave stations set with link parameter differs from the actual number of slave stations a When the set number of slave stations is greater than the actual number of slave stations the slave stations do not exist in the system are treated as communication faulty stations b If the set number of slave stations is less than the actual number of slave stations the data link is on
319. splay 3 Displaying link registers W for RFRP instructions a Displays the data in the area set for data transmission from the host station to the master station by link parameter setting 4 Displaying link registers W for RTOP instructions a Displays the data in the area set for data transmission from the master station to the host station by link parameter setting 10 12 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode Applicability MELSEC A 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 2 Monitoring the Special Link Relays and Special Link Registers Faulty stations in the MELSECNET data link system can be detected by using the A7PU to monitor the special link relays and special link registers When the GPP IBM PC AT is available detect them by using the link monitoring in Section 10 1 Refer to Section 9 2 and Section 9 3 for details on special link relays and special link registers START Monitor D9204 to check loop status Is the data 09204 0 YES NO YES Is the data in D9204 5 NO Master station is faulty Is the data 09204 1 Monitor 09228 to D9231 to check the number of faulty stations Monitor D9205 and D9206 to check the station at which loopback is performed Monitor 09232 to 09239 to check the faulty
320. ssigned to the second half link parameters is the range assigned to the first half link parameters final device number 1 or later Example If the range of BO to FF is assigned to the first link parameters B100 or later can be assigned to the second half parameters If O point is assigned to the first half link parameters assignment of the second half link parameters can be started with B WO 1 The following can be set in the MELSECNET II mode 1024 bytes in the first half link parameters 1024 bytes in the second half link parameters 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 3 Link parameter setting screens The following shows the link parameter setting screens a First half link parameters 000 8FF 000 4 2 00 800 8 MELSECNET Il MODE LINK SLAVE FIRST M ALL L W D T INTER MASTER PC FOR LINK MITTENT 280 37F 200 37F 14134444 amp lt FIRST L L 280 2FF 100 17F 200 27F 180 1FF 300 37F 100 17F 300 37F 100 17F 200 2FF 200 2FF 300 4FF 300 3FF 500 8FF 400 4FF MASTER L LOCAL R REMOTE L LOCAL PRESS lt SSN gt TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RENGE OF B W REMOTE b Second half link parameters B1 1000 8FF W 000 4 B2 00 p 800 8FF MELSECNET MODE LINK SLAVE SECOND ALLL W D T MASTER PC FOR LINK MITTENT 280 37F 200
321. station J station For master station AJ 1AT21B A1SJ71AT21B 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A 4 2 3 System devices Table 4 2 Link modules available for the three tier system Q Available Applicable system MELSECNET data link MELSECNET B data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET Module meee MELSECNET MELSECNET Remarks I composite I composite mode mode mode mode Mie R Mie M L Rim a rm e Um z r These cannot 9e used asa uad station for the third tier bs with ink Use the station number function setting switch to e the selection of master or local station A3ACPUP21 S3 REMARK 1 The definitions of L m station 2 station and station in Table 4 2 as follows a station Local station in the second tier master station in the third tier b 2 station Local station in the third tier station Remote station in the third tier 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 2 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued Applicable system MELSECNET data link MELSECNET B data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET II composite II composite O Available Module Model Remarks MELSECNET MELSECNET mode mode mode mode eee AJ71AP21 R21 AJ71AP21 S3 Use the station number setting switch to set
322. station numbers the MELSECNET data link system Assign station numbers from the master station set 00 to the master station in ascending order to the forward loop direction The settable maximum station number is 64 In a three tier system assign station numbers from the master stations of each tier set 00 to the master stations in ascending order to the forward loop direction The settable maximum station number is 64 Master station Master station for the third tier Slave station No 1 Slave station No 2 Slave station No 3 Slave station No 64 Station No O1 Forward loop Sub slave station No 1 Sub slave station No 2 Sub slave station No 64 Forward loop Fig 8 1 Setting link module station numbers REMARK For station number setting of the link modules refer to the manual for each link module 8 PROCEDURES OPERATION mmn nr r Precautions for setting the link module station numbers The following shows the precautions for station number setting 1 Station numbers have to be consecutive Station numbers cannot be skipped as Fig 8 2 If station numbers are not set consecutively the time taken for the system to switch to the loopback mode when the slave station is powered off is increased Therefore the loopback processing is not performed within the monitoring time set in link parameter which may cause the entire data link system to stop Do not skip station numbers
323. ster station for the third tier When a CPU module with link function is used with the AJ71AT21B in a three tier system the CPU module can be used as a master station for the third tier and the AJ71AT21B can be used as a local station in the second tier Second tier Master station J 71 A T 21 B MA 3 N C P U P 21 Third tier Local station Note that the following ANACPUP21 R21 versions and later can be used as a master station for the third tier When a version earlier than that is used construction of a three tier system where the AJ71AT21B is in the second tier and the CPU module is in the third tier is not possible A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPUP21 S1 2 21 51 21 A3ACPUR21 4 COMPOSITION OF A SYSTEM 4 3 3 System devices Table 4 3 Link modules available for the three tier system O Available 0 Applicable system system MELSECNET B data link MELSECNET data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET one oe MELSECNET MELSECNET composite composite mode mode mode mode m e m efr A0JOHCPUP21 These cannot be used as a master station for the third tier gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Ny N I Ns O z z z z o o S ooo ol o o a a c lt c cC c c 9 a a Sic TT 2 Y gt 15 Z O 5 N 2 gt gt gt NI N N 2 2
324. system and MELSECNET B data link system MELSECNET data link system MELSECNET B data link system Optical data link system Shielded twisted pair cable 51 or H PCF Coaxial cable data link system Gl type optical y data link system t tical fiber YES Mp fiber cable cable Communication speed Varies depending on the 1 25MBPS 125kBPS 250kBPS 500kBPS 1MBPS communications speed Max 10km 125kBPS 1200m Between stations 500m 250kBPS 600m 500kBPS 400m 1MBPS 200m Max 10 km Max 10 km Overall cable distance Between Between stations 1 km stations 2 km Up to 32 1 master station 31 local Number of stations Up to 65 1 master station 64 local remote stations remote stations Modulation method CMI method NRZI method The loopback function activated by detection of an error or cable I MA The diagnostic function such as a link RAS functions disconnection and the diagnostic function such as a link line check line check of the host station of the host station Cable used Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable Shielded twisted pair cable 17 to 11dBm 17 to 10dBm Sending level peak value peak value 32 to 11dBm 29 to 10dBm Receiving level peak value peak value 1 OVERVIEW es 1 2 4 Differences among the MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode and MELSECNET II composite mode The data link system has the MELSECNET mode the MELSECNET II mode or the MELSE
325. t Master station assignment range 000 of I O points used by the host 16F station yo assignment setting range The range marked with is assumed to be used for input and or output modules mounted or as empty slots Link Link out inputs puts Y X Fig 7 50 Assignment example b assignment example I O ALLOCATION Me ES di SLT SLT SLT VO 1 0 NO UNT NO UNT NO UNT 16 PT 32 0 32 48 64 16 32 48 64 QN 25 pe lt gt 200 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 O Ot Ot N O O 0 0 gt ZTONMCOODW 4 PRESS lt END gt WHEN SET Slot numbers to 23 Assignment of I O modules in the master station 24 to 26 Range marked with an asterisk the 170 to 1FF range 27 to 42 Assignment of remote I O station No 1 43 Empty area between remote I O stations No 1 and No 3 shaded ZY area 44 to 59 Assignment of remote station No 3 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 2 When the area is assigned after the M L area When the M R area is assigned after the M L area with the link parameters the I O assignment is as shown in the following example a Assignment example by l
326. t Y points have been assigned 1 Assignment of local station No 1 Local station No 1 uses the X YO to 17F range as inputs and outputs for host station The X Y180 to X Y7FF range can be used for the data link 2 Assignment of local station No 2 Local station No 2 uses the X YO to X Y14F range as inputs and outputs for host station The X Y150 to X Y7FF range can be used for the data link Local station Local station No 1 No 2 Master station gt Theranges in the shaded areas be used for internal memory M Fig 7 11 Inputs X and outputs Y assignment example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 4 Link parameter setting When the assignment of 1 to 3 is executed set the link parameters as shown below 000 27F 000 2BF 680 77F 600 77F B W OW W Y 7 X X nr ormzx cr E1451 t 100 17F 100 17F 680 6FF 200 27F 600 67F 280 2FF 200 27F 200 2BF 700 77F 200 27F 700 77F 200 27F t M MASTER L LOCAL REMOTE L LOCAL REMOTE MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET I MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET I composite mode mode composite mode 7 DATALINK SETTINGS ix qe MELSEC A 7 7 2 Remote system assignment and link parameter setting example The following describes the assignment of link relays link registers inputs and outputs and link parameters used for the remote system Assignment fo
327. t half 1 if the first half range is 0 1 10 1 OVERVIEW mmn rm 1 2 5 Differences between QCPU A QnACPU local stations 1 QCPU B 2 Link refresh Operation after power OFF ON or resetting CPU module CPU module is in STOP When using an QCPU local station This module replaces or adds a part of the existing MELSECNET II data link system to QCPU Master station M m 09 MELSECNET II Local station Local station Differences between QCPU and A QnACPU local stations When replacing an A OnACPU local station with a QCPU one pay attention to the following point For details refer to MELSECNET MELSECNET B Local Station Data Link Module User s Manual Table 1 3 Differences between QCPU and A QnACPU local stations Description QCPU local station A QnACPU local station Refreshes data with the sequence Automatically refreshes data at either of the following timing program Upon completion of link scan Link parameter setting refresh Only after execution of the END instruction in the sequence parameters is not required program For the ANUCPU QnACPU A2US H CPU S1 Does not refresh data when the CPU Q2AS H CPU S1 and QCPU A refresh ranges can be module is in STOP status changed with refresh parameters Starts data communication with other stations by executing the program for refresh Y10 ON with the CPU module
328. t module Output module Special function module Fig 9 9 System configuration 9 40 9 MELSEC A Link device assignment SLAVE MASTER PC STATIONS 000 15F 000 186 200 294 300 3C1 260 47F 580 7FF 1A0 3BF 500 76F xx zzzo lt lt gt 22 0 060 18 0 0 15 100 186 250 294 340 3C1 700 7FF 390 47F 260 36F 580 6AF 030 12F 250 33F 1B0 2BF 080 1AF 6D0 76F 1A0 25F 2A0 3BF 500 5BF 000 09F 210 2CF 300 41F 000 0 1 M MASTER LOCAL REMOTE L LOCAL REMOTE Fig 9 10 Link device assignment REMARK In the M R area of remote stations No 1 and No 4 two points W200 and W201 W250 and W251 from the head device are used by the system These points cannot be used for a user program Refer to Section 7 6 3 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode mode composite mode 25 Je 9 1 MELSEC A Applicability 9 PROGRAMMING 9 8 1 Read program RFRP instruction This is a program to read the data of the special function module mounted on the remote I O station No 1 For system configuration and link parameter setting refer to Fig 9 9 and Fig 9 10 Program example 1 Executed only once when the start signal is turned ON PROGRAMMING P
329. ta to another station Send station area M9039 Enables a link refresh disable area to be created with DI EI Sets the link refresh disable bw 48 90 0 The module that performs link refresh only after the execution of the END instruction in the sequence program AS3MCPU AnACPU AnUCPU A2USCPU S1 QnACPU QnAS H CPU S1 even if data of two words or more are sent to link registers the old and new data are not mixed Precautions when using the MELSECNET II mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode The timing to be link refreshed may differ between the device range assigned with the first half of the link parameters and that assigned with the last half of the link parameters Handshake processing is required to receive the data written at the same timing po wee w m s m e ub w m s sb m s G eee m s m eee ee Example 1 In the following program when WO to WFF and BO to BFF are assigned with the first half link parameters and W500 to W5FF and B500 to BSFF are assigned with the second half link parameters data written to WO and W500 at the same time are received Send station Conditional contact BO 8500 4 For handshake a At the sending station BO turns ON when DO data are transferrd to WO and B500 turns ON when D100 data are transferrd to W
330. tation 1 station n Fig 3 1 Flow of data by B W communication b 1 1 data communications This is 1 1 data communications between a master station and a local station ON OFF data can be communicated using inputs X and outputs Y Master Master station station Output Y Input X Output Y Input X Input X Output Y Output Y Input X Local Remote station station Fig 3 2 Flow of input X and output Y communication data 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM mms 2 Transient transmission function The transient transmission function a reads writes data from to a device in a local station by using a master station programmable controller CPU and b communicates data between a peripheral device connected to a programmable controller CPU and a programmable controller CPU in another station The transient transmission function executes the following types of processings a Communications between a master station and a local station Read write for devices T C D and W in a local station by a master station programmable controller CPU LRDP LWTP 1 instructions in sequence program are used for this processing at the master station b Communications between a master station and a remote I O station Read write of data from to the buffer memory of a special function module connected to a remote I O station is performed from a master station programmable con
331. tation CPU module 2 1024 points 128 bytes Master station 1024 bytes Local station Remote MELSECNET data link system Optical data link system MELSECNET II composite mode Total number of slave station link points Available link points for master station 4096 points 512 bytes 1024 points 4096 points 8192 bytes 2048 bytes 1024 bytes link parameters first half 1024 bytes link parameters second half 512 bytes 512 bytes Number of I O points Number of I O points 512 points 512 points 1 25Mbps Half duplex bit serial Frame synchronization Duplex loop For SI or H PCF type optical fiber cable Up to 10km 32810ft Between stations 1km 328 1ft For type optical fiber cable Up to 10km 32810ft Between stations 2km 6562ft Up to 65 stations loop 1 master station 64 local remote stations CMI Conforms to HDLC frame method Retry by CRC generating polynomial edi 1 and timeout The loopback function activated by detection of an error or cable disconnection The diagnostic functions such as link line check of the host station Optical fiber cable SI 12dB km 3dB km SI 17 to 11 dBm peak value Gl 17 to 10 dBm peak value SI 32 to 11 dBm peak value Gl 29 to 10 dBm peak value The overall cable distance means a distance from OUT of the master station to IN of the master station via a slave stations Distance betwe
332. tations as shown in Fig 7 24 260 2 0 300 360 M R area area 1 Ri indicates the remote 1 0 station No 1 M R area 2 R2 indicates the remote station No 2 3 indicates the remote 1 0 station No 3 Fig 7 24 Link register W assignment example b Consider the range used by the system when assigning the M R area The system uses the M R area to execute RFRP RTOP instructions 1 Number of points used by the system The link register W 1 point is used for one special function module installed to a remote station 7 DATA LINK SETTINGS es 2 Range used by the system The range used by the system is from the head device number of M R area assigned from each remote station to number of use points 1 For example when three special function modules are installed to remote station No 2 the range W360 to 362 in the M R area W360 to W3AF shown below is used by the system Link register sed For system use W361 M R area of remote W362 station No 2 W363 Available with RTOP instruction W3AF 3 Make sure that the number of link points per station is as follows Refer to Section 7 6 1 e Remote station 512 bytes or less Inputs and outputs 512 points of X YO to 1FF POINT 1 If the M R area used by the system is used incorrectly in a user program data cannot be read written correctly when the RFRP RTOP
333. tatus of local OFF Normal Turned ON if an error occurs in one local station other than the host station M9255 stations except N Eror in the loop host e Automatically turned OFF when the faulty station returns to the normal state or the data link returns to the normal state by switching the loop line That 9 9 3 Special Link Registers MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode Applicability Ioa opecial link registers store causes of errors that occur at the time of data link in the form of value Monitoring special link registers enables to detect the area with error or the cause of error 9 3 1 opecial link registers enabled only for the master station Table 9 5 and Table 9 6 show the special registers controlled only when the host station is set to the master station Device Number LRDP execution result LWTP execution result Table 9 5 List of MELSECNET special link registers 0 Normal LRDP instruction setting fault Corresponding station error LRDP cannot be executed in the corresponding station 0 Normal LWTP instruction setting fault Corresponding station error LWTP cannot be executed in the corresponding station Description Stores the execution result of an LRDP word device read instruction M9201 ON LRDP
334. ted from the data link system to maintain the data link with the normally operating stations The disconnected local station or remote station is automatically returned to the system when the normal operation state is restored The function that makes this possible is the automatic return function 2 Setting with without automatic return function The link module connected to the data link system can select whether or not to use the automatic return function for each station Refer to the user s manual for each link module for details on whether or not to use the automatic return function 3 Method for reconnecting a disconnected station with without automatic return function The method for reconnecting a disconnected station varies depending on whether the automatic return function is enabled or not a When data link stops due to an error in the master station 1 Automatic return function is set for the master station After resetting the master station reset all of the local and remote stations for which the automatic return function is set 2 Automatic return function is not set for the master station After resetting all of the local and remote stations for which the automatic return function is set reset the master station b When a local or remote station is disconnected due to an error Local Remote Master station Conditions for return I O station Enabled Returns automatically after the error is
335. ter station to addresses 0 to 9 of ions H580 HO 255 K10 Read with an RTOP i instruction Y59F instruction has been completed or an Resets and initializes handshake signal Y58F when writing called by an RTOP 80 to X Y9F of remote I O station No 4 X59D special tunction module error Generates a pulse to reset M1 M1 turns ON when 2 turns OFF from ON the special function module installed in Y58F instruction cannot be executed PLS M2 X59D Le SET M3 590 RST RST COMPLETE Sequence program for remote station No 4 Heset the error Hesets error signal X59D of the special function module signal of the special function module MGR 9 47 9 MELSEC A PRECAUTIONS 1 To execute an RTOP instruction always interlock with YnF and X n 1 F n the device number of the master station that corresponds to the I O number of the slot in which a special function module is installed It is first 2 digits of the 3 digit representation for the first half link parameters 16 points of 32 occupied points and at the same time do not execute an RFRP or RTOP instruction at two or more positions within a single special function module Turn ON OFF YnF and X n 1 F as shown below RTOP execution Turned OFF by a sequence program X n 1 F The RTOP execution start signal must be always tur
336. ternal conductor LAMM ARAM AMM AAI Applicable cable Remove the outer sheath 9C 2V b Slip a nut a washer a gasket and a clamp on the coaxial cable and loosen the external conductor as shown below LR LC b ROC OG LOC Ct CU Washer Gasket Y To the next page 5 SPECIFICATIONS es From the previous page Cut the external conductor insulator and internal conductor to specified dimensions as shown right As for the external conductor cut it as the same dimension as that of taper part and smooth down it on the clamp Internal conductor Applicable Insulation C material CANE C Clamp and B external conductor v Solder the contact to the tip of the internal conductor Soldering Insert the contact assembly to the plug shell and engage the plug shell with the nut 5 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A 1 Use caution as follows when soldering the contact to the internal conductor a Solder must not be pumped up at soldering part b The tail end of the contact and the cut end of the insulator must contact close to each other Also the contact must not cut in the insulator c Apply solder quickly so that the insulator may not deform 2 Before connecting or disconnecting the coaxial cable connector be sure to touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may harm the module 5 S
337. the selection of master or local station AJ71AP21 R21 AJ71AP21 S3 CPU module Q2ACPU S1 link module Q4ACPU Used only for local stations e Installed in an I O slot in an extension base unit A1SJ71AP23 Q R23Q A1SJ71AT21 B Use the station number setting switch to set the selection of master or local station AJ71AT21B gt gt gt P P gt gt O O gt P P gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt UI NI N gt NI gt gt ol ol o NI A O NI NMI N N N gt 2 Z Z Z O al SI SI gt gt C C C C gt gt gt Z Z Z Z S O O O O T re Z Z Z Z 9 O 9 O OF OF OF 9 O O F uvl ul v 0 Ol Ol Ol O O 9 0 Ul Ul 9 Ul Ul 3 3 Vi VIS c c c c 3 3 Q 2 3 9 utc c sS C cy 8 c e 4 COMPOSITION OF A THREE TIER SYSTEM MELSEC A Table 4 2 Link modules available for the three tier system Continued O Available 2 ss system MELSECNET data link MELSECNET B data link MELSEC MELSECNET MELSEC MELSECNET MORUE MELSECNET MELSECNET i II composite II composite mode mode mode mode t R M t M efr um e ume A2ASCPU A2USHCPU 51 APPROP A1SJ71AT21B Q2ASCPU 51 Q2ASHCPU es A2ACPU Use the station number setting switch to set the A3ACPU selection of master or A2UCP
338. the master station and local stations M L area Fig 7 10 shows the case when assigning 256 points to the master station 128 points to local station No 1 196 points to local station No 2 and 128 points empty area between local station No 1 and local station No 2 MNasterstation MNasterstation Local station No 1 Local station No 2 Used asa 579 Used pm Used asa i register D register D register D Read Write by the em Read Write by the hoe m Write by the os station station station Read Head word data Write Write word data O Usable range Fig 7 10 Link register W assignment example b The empty area marked with 1 in the M L area in Fig 7 10 cannot be used as a substitute for data register D in the master station and all local stations The M L area is the range of the smallest to the largest device number WO to 2BF assigned by the link parameters 7 DATALINK SETTINGS es 3 Assignment of inputs outputs Y a The range used for data link by the master station The master station uses the X YO to X Y14F range as inputs and outputs of host station The X Y150 to X Y7FF range can be used for the data link oO Assignment for local stations In this example inputs X and outputs Y are not required because there is an empty area in the link relay B assignment However to explain the assignment example of local station 128 input X points and 128 outpu
339. tion System configuration For MELSECNET data link system Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote station 0 xao 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 7 X20 Y30 __ 70 XO Y80 P21 AJ72 aN AJ72 PU PU O P25 XF XAF P25 P21 P21 YBF XF Y7F X9F xor X4F _ YOF Y7F yor YBO Y130 YAO Y120 YBF Y13F YAF Y12F Y12F Y140 Y190 Y1A0 LET Y15F Y19F Y17F Y20F 14 19 1 Y1AF Input module t O Output module S Special function module For MELSECNET B data link system Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote station 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 J X20 vao x80 A3N X80 Bul v Y80 XAO Y70 80 n t 71 3N B AJ72 PU AJ72 XAF T25B i P21lT 1 T25B 21 21 B B XF ne ae XBF X9F 2 Y4E Y7F Y9F YBO Y130 YAO Y120 Y150 X110 YBF Y13F YAF 12 16 Y8F X12F Y140 190 200 130 190 15 9 Y17F Y20F Y14F Y19F Y13F Y1AF Input module Output module Special function module 00 Fig 9 7 System configuration 9 36 9 MELSEC A Link device assignment SLAVE MASTER PC STATIONS LINK 000 15F 000 186 200 294 300 3 1 260 47F 580 7FF 1A0 3BF 500 76F xx lt lt SE
340. tion No 2 a Range used for data link by master station The master station uses the X YO to 14F range as I O of host station For data link the X Y150 to 7FF range can be used b Input and output range used for data link by local station No 1 The local station No 1 uses the X YO to 7F range as I O of host station For the data link the X Y80 to 1FF range can be used c Input and output range used for data link by local station No 3 The local station No 3 uses the X YO to FF range as I O of host station For the data link the X Y100 to 7FF range can be used Master Local station Local station _ Local station station No 1 No 2 No 3 points X Y000 I O points Hsec Dy ihe I O points points used by the used by the used by the host station host station host station 777 a NEN De UE Fig 7 23 Input X and output Y assignment example 7 DATALINK SETTINGS MELSEC A 6 Link parameter setting oet the link parameters assigned as 1 to 5 as follows a First half link parameters 000 8FF 000 4FF 00 800 8FF MELSECNET MODE LINK SLAVE FIRST M ALLL MASTER PC 280 37F 200 37F FIRST MeL 200 2FF 200 2FF 280 2FF 100 17F 200 27F 180 1 FF 300 4FF 300 3FF 500 8FF 400 4FF 300 37F 100 17F 300 37F 100 17F M MASTER L LOCAL REMOTE PRESS SSN TO SELECT 1ST 2ND RANGE OF B W b Second half link parameters 000 8FF 000 4FF 00
341. to the 156 extension base unit where the QCPU local station is mounted 1 OVERVIEW es 1 5 Applicable Link Modules and General Names 1 3 1 Applicable link modules This manual explains the link modules shown below The link modules compatible with MELSECNET II mode also support the MELSECNET mode MELSECNET data link system 1 CPU modules a Link modules compatible with MELSECNET mode A0J2HCPUP21 R21 A1NCPUP21 R21 A1NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 R21 S1 2 A2NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 R21 S1 A2NCPUP21 S4 A3NCPUP21 R21 A3NCPUP21 S3 A2CCPUP21 R21 Link modules compatible with MELSECNET II mode 2 21 21 51 A2ACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUP21 R21 S1 A2ACPUP21 S4 21 21 21 53 The following link modules installed to base unit a b Link modules compatible with MELSECNET mode Installed in the CPU slot AJ72P25 R25 for remote station AJ72P25 S3 for remote I O station Link modules compatible with MELSECNET II mode Installed in an I O slot AJ71AP21 R21 for master station local station A1SJ71AP21 R21 for master station local station AJ71AP21 S3 for master station local station The following link modules are used independently without being installed to a base unit a Link modules compatible with MELSECNET mode A0J2P25 R25 for remote station AOJ2P25 S3 for remote I O station 1 13 1 OVERVIEW es MELSEC
342. tputs Y Master Master station station Output Y Input X Output Y Input X Input X Output Y Output Y Input X Local Remote station station Fig 2 2 Flow of input X and output Y communication data 2 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET DATA LINK SYSTEM es 2 Transient transmission function The transient transmission function reads writes data from to a device in a local station by the master station programmable controller CPU or communicates data between a peripheral device connected to a programmable controller CPU and a programmable controller CPU in another station The transient transmission includes the following a Communication between master station and local station The device C D W of a local station is read written from the programmable controller CPU of the master station The master station uses LRDP and LWTP instructions in sequence program b Communication between master station and remote I O station The content of buffer memory of the special function module connected from remote I O station is read written from the programmable controller CPU of the master station The master station uses RFRP and RTOP 1 instructions in sequence program c Access of peripheral device and special function module to from other station Access of the peripheral device and special function module connected to the programmable controller CPU to from other stat
343. troller CPU RFRP RTOP instructions in sequence program are used at the master station c Access between a peripheral device or special function module and another station Another station is accessed from a peripheral device or special function module connected to a programmable controller CPU As Table 3 1 shows the accessible station varies depending on the peripheral device or special function module installed in a master local or remote I O station However the stations in Table 3 1 are basically accessible The manual of the used peripheral device or special function module gives details about the functions that can be executed by that peripheral device or special function module Table 3 1 Communicating Stations Available to Peripheral Devices and Special Function Modules Station where a peripheral device is connected Access target station Master Station Local Station Remote Station Local Station Not accessible Not accessible Remote I O Station Not accessible Not accessible 3 TWO TIER SYSTEM IN THE MELSECNET B DATA LINK SYSTEM MELSEC A REMARK ui e When the AnACPU P21 R21 ANUCPU A2US H CPU S1 or QCPU A is 3 used the LRDP LWTP RFRP RTOP instructions of the dedicated instructions can also be used For details of the instructions refer to the Type ANSHCPU AnACPU AnUCPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Dedicated Instructions IB 66251 When the QnACPU Q2AS H CPU S1 is used the ZNRD ZNWR
344. tten by the parameters RTOP instruction exceeds the link register W Change the number of words to be written by the RTOP instruction The RFRP instruction was executed when a 14 Special function module hardware failure special function module has a hardware failure The RTOP instruction was executed when a Special function module hardware failure special function module has a hardware failure range specified with the parameters Replace the fuse in the module loaded to the Fuse blown an module remote 1 station I O module verification error The I O module information of the remote station is different e Check and or replace the I O module from that recognized at power up Reset the master station or the remote 1 An I O module is not secure I O station 2 An I O module was removed or another I O module was loaded during operation Neither inputs X nor outputs Y have been specified with the parameters station and set the parameters again Check the link assignment for the I O modules I O assignment error in GPP A7LMS GPP and the master station and correct the function assignment Check if local station data are set for a remote Remote station specification error station number with link parameters and correct the settings 10 10 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Displays the ON OFF status of inputs
345. ula to calculate the link refresh time o2 required for a local station When the link operates in the MELSECNET II mode or the MELSECNET II composite mode the number of B W points is all points set with the first half and second half link parameters B Y W a2 Kex 048 Kisx 1924 module Link module A1SCPU A1SJCPU S3 A2SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJHCPU A2SHCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU S1 AnNCPU A2ACPU S1 A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU A1SJ71AT21B AJ71AT21B 339 0 76 0 54 0 48 0 54 0 48 0 80 0 71 NM ter ER A 0 54 0 52 0 54 0 51 0 59 0 57 4 50 4 32 4 16 4 32 4 16 4 56 4 31 Q4ACPU 3 Remote I O stations Use the following formula to calculate the I O refresh time required for a remote O station 3 Kri X EE ms 256 08 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B 6 LINK DATA SEND RECEIVE PROCESSING Er AND PROCESSING TIME Applicability EHI 6 2 3 Link data communication time link scan The following describes the method used for calculating the link data communication time When a MELSECNET data link system is used In the MELSECNET mode LS K Kn x Total number of remote stations x Total number of loca stations Kg ms 2 In the MELSECNET II mode LS K KL x T
346. ule is the RUN LED on the CPU module lit Is the RUN LED on the CPU module flashing NO Has a programmable controller CPU stop error occurred RUN LED on the link card in the master sta YES Correct the sequence program and reset tion lit Replace the data link module hardware Is entire OFF data link YES system disabled Refer to Section 10 3 2 Data in D9204 is 5 NO Is data link YES tion disabled Refer to Section 10 3 3 NO Is there a data YES sending receiving Refer to Section 10 3 4 error NO Do unspecified YES Are the following switches set as described below Master station model setting switch ONLINE 0 1 Station number set switch 0 Refer to Section 10 4 number of slave stations become faulty Refer to Section 10 3 5 When mode setting station number setting or baud rate setting for link module is not normal SP UNIT LAY ERR causes by switching CPU module from STOP to RUN 10 14 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET I MELSECNET II 9 mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING sea CU MELSEC A 10 3 2 Flowchart for when the data link is disabled throughout the entire system ERROR OCCURRENCE NO Was the system powered up c
347. ulty 3 Displaying link scan time D9207 to D9209 a Displays the time required for data link between the master station and all slave stations 1 MAX Displays the maximum value of time required for data link 2 MIN Displays the minimum value of time required for data link 3 PRESENT Displays the present value of time required for data link 4 Displaying loop status of data link system D9204 to D9206 a The Table 10 1 shows the present loop status Table 10 1 Data link status display Forward loop Reverse loop Forward loop Reverse loop Loopback station L Local station R Remote I O station Forward direction loopback Reverse direction loopback Master Station Reverse direction loopback Data link disabled 10 3 10 TROUBLESHOOTING es b The loop status and loopback execution station are the same as the following registers 2 Loopback execution station D9205 D9206 5 Operation status of all slave stations local and remote stations The status of all of the slave stations in the system is displayed as follows L column Describes status of present data link C Communicating normally 09224 to 09227 D Disconnected due to communication stop D9224 to D9227 The possible causes to be disconnected are as follows 1 The power supply to the disconnected station is OFF 2 The disconnected station is reset 3 An error that causes operation stop to the program
348. umn is D the previous data in the S A B C and D columns will remain unchanged 10 5 MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode MELSECNET MELSECNET II MELSECNET MELSECNET II mode mode composite mode mode composite mode 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Applicability n MUR 10 1 2 Local station link monitor The following describes the link monitor when connecting GPP to the local station A6GPP Displays the B W Y Displays the loopback Displays the local receive status execution status station operation status G LOCAL Displays the STATUS STATION NO L 1 STATUS OF SLAVE STATIONS operation mode of the host station MODE OOP BACK ON LINE OFF LINE LOOP TEST Displays the communication COMM STATUS BWY FROM MASTER PC status of the P MTR WAITING OK host station OK STOP OK B W FROM Displays the loop OK SUB MASTER PC line status of the host station Displays the B W receive status SCAN TIME 10 ms PROGRAM Fig 10 2 Local station link monitor screen when connecting to local station Displays the state of data received by devices B W and Y Displays the opera tion mode of the self A 70 j 2 Q v ON LINE OFF LINE Displays the com LOOP TEST munications state of the self COMM STATUS BUY FROM MASTER PC Displays the state of data received by P MTR WAITING OK NG devices B and W BW FR
349. unication detection Initial communication start d The error detection program must be written before the initial communication detection program If initial communication detection program is written first the occurrence of errors and the execution of initial communication may not be detected 6 When RFRP and RTOP instructions cannot be executed because the special function module is faulty X n 1 D is turned ON a When YnD is turned ON X n 1 D is turned OFF b If X n 1 D is turned ON a special function module might be faulty or the module might not be mounted correctly Check the special function module at which the error occurred 7 Write the following timing circuit to turn YnD ON OFF with SET RST instruction a Turn YnD ON when X n 1 D is turned ON b Turn YnD OFF only once when X n 1 D is turned OFF 9 9 9 Fault Detection Program MELSECNET mode MELSECNET MELSECNET B Operating Mode Applicability MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET II MELSECNET composite mode mode rr The following shows a program with which a faulty station is detected by the master station when an error occurs in any of the local remote stations No 1 to 4 System configuration For MELSECNET data link system station Remote I O station No 1 X30 0 21 T pees C nla 248 x9 YaF Y7F YS XO X20 YBO Y130 YBF
350. urned OFF when the master station is reset after being placed in the or self online mode loopback test Turned ON when any of the following errors occurs on the forward loop line between the master station and the final station Cable disconnection OFF Normal Forward loop receiver error of the master station link module M9225 Forward loop error ON Error Forward loop transmitter error of the link module on the final local station Turned ON when the station to station test including the final station is executed during the data link Turned OFF automatically when the error state is eliminated Turned ON when any of the following errors occurs on the reverse loop line between the master station and station No 1 Cable disconnection Normal Reverse loop receiver error of the master station link module M9226 Reverse loop error i Error e Reverse loop transmitter error of the link module on station No 1 Turned ON when the station to station test was executed at station No 1 during data link execution Turned OFF automatically when the error state is eliminated Unexecuted Forward loop M9227 test or Turned ON when a forward loop test or reverse loop test is being executed reverse loop for the master station test being executed RUN or ON OFF status depends on the operation status of the local station STEP RUN e Turned ON when the status of any local station in the loop changes to
351. w Forward loop Fig 8 16 Reverse loop test 8 PROCEDURES TO OPERATION n y SE A 3 Test procedure The following flowchart shows the operation procedure for forward loop test reverse loop test START Connect the optical fiber cables or coaxial cables as shown in Figs 8 15 and 8 16 Set the data link module to the STOP state Select the forward loop test Set the mode select switch to the 3 mode reverse loop test mode for the position to select the forward loop test master station Set the mode select switch to the 4 position to select the reverse loop test Set the slave stations to the on line mode Reset the master station Start the forward loop test reverse loop test approximately 7 seconds after resetting the master station Execute the forward loop test reverse loop test mode Determine the forward loop test reverse loop test results COMPLETE 4 Test result The LEDs on the link module of the master station or the GPP link monitor function show s the test result a For GPP link monitor refer to Section 10 1 b The descriptions of the LEDs are as follows 1 Normal The following LEDs flash in order CRC OVER AB IF TIME DATA UNDER 2 Error The corresponding LEDs flash and the test is discontinued a When the TIME DATA and UNDER LEDs flash Hardware failure Disconnection of the optical fiber coaxial cabl
352. ways remains Stores the status of 09249 No 17 to 31 Example When the statuses of local stations No 7 and No 15 are either STOP or PAUSE 1 is set to bit 6 and bit 14 of D9248 When D9248 is monitored its value is 16448 4040 bit corresponding to the station itself is not set regardless of the status of the station itself always 0 is stored Detects station Nos of faulty local stations except for the host station in the loop and then stores the data into the corresponding bits in the special registers for link as shown below D9252 Stores the status of Error detection is performed only for local stations other than the No 1 to No 16 host station The status of remote stations remains O peice e NUMBER fors ra bra e 11 oro o be oz os os oa os be bo Local station error sese uis urs oe oi fte te fis jus us Ri n 9253 0 Las L29 2 127 126 125 124 1 23 122 1121 20 98117 Bits corresponding to the station Nos of faulty local stations except for host station turn to 1 Stores the status of Example When local No 12 is faulty 1 is set to bit 11 of D9252 S No 17 to No 31 When D9252 is monitored its value is 2048 500 When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operating status the bit is automatically reset to O
353. y turned OFF when the link parameter is received Only valid while the loop line in which the data link is executed is online Normal e Controlled by whether the host station stopped the data link or not M9251 Link halt Halt Automatically turned OFF when the data link returns to the normal status Only effective while the loop line which the data link is executed is online RUN or STEP RUN Controlled according to the operation status of a master station M9253 Master station status Turned ON when the status of the master station is either STOP or PAUSE operating status STOP or Turned OFF when the status of the master station changes to RUN or PAUSE STEP RUN status Controlled according to the operation status of a local station other than the host station RUN or STEP RUN Turned ON when the status of a local station other than the host station in Operating status of the loop is either STOP PAUSE M9254 local stations STOP or Not turned ON even if the status of the host station is either STOP or except host PAUSE PAUSE Automatically turned OFF when the status of a local station other than the host station in the loop changes to RUN or STEP RUN That is M9254 is turned OFF when bits D9248 and D9249 are OFF is M9255 is turned OFF when bits D9252 to D9253 are all OFF Controlled by detecting by an error of a local station other than the host station Error s
354. ytes can be assigned up to 2048 bytes can be used for data link In this regard however the MELSECNET mode compatible local station is up to 1024 bytes which is the same as that of MELSECNET mode and the MELSECNET mode compatible remote station is up to 512 bytes A MELSECNET mode compatible local station can only read the range of link relays B and link registers W assigned to the first half link parameter Devices assigned to the second half link parameter cannot be read L1 station in Fig 5 10 for example cannot read the devices in the range of B W300 to 4FF because it is used for a MELSECNET mode compatible data link module MELSECNET II mode compatible master stations and local stations can read the range assigned to both the first and second half link parameters 5 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A System configuration 1 AJ72P25 A3NCPUP21 ASACPUP 1 MELSECNET mode compatible data link module is used for the M and L2 stations A MELSECNET mode compatible data link module is used for the L1 station B WO 100 200 300 400 00 FFF 5 First half link Second half parameter setting link parameter range setting range Fig 5 10 System using MELSECNET II composite mode REMARK 1 When a MELSECNET mode compatible link module is used for the master station the system operates in the MELSECNET mode even if a MELSECNET II mode compatible link module is connected to a loc

Type MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Data Link

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents